37DLPLUS Manual

fkpqor`qflk=j^kr^i
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
m~êí=kçK=VNMJOPV`=
pçÑíï~êÉ=sNKMO
NMLNOLMP
ã
`çéóêáÖÜí= =OMMP=Äó=m~å~ãÉíêáÅëI=fåÅK
^ää=êáÖÜíë=êÉëÉêîÉÇK
kç=é~êí=çÑ=íÜáë=ã~åì~ä=ã~ó=ÄÉ=êÉéêçÇìÅÉÇ=çê=íê~åëãáííÉÇ=áå=~åó=Ñçêã=çê=Äó=~åó=ãÉ~åëI=
ÉäÉÅíêçåáÅ=çê=ãÉÅÜ~åáÅ~äI=áåÅäìÇáåÖ=éÜçíçÅçéóáåÖI=êÉÅçêÇáåÖI=çê=Äó=~åó=áåÑçêã~íáçå=
ëíçê~ÖÉ=~åÇ=êÉíêáÉî~ä=ëóëíÉãI=ïáíÜçìí=íÜÉ=ïêáííÉå=éÉêãáëëáçå=çÑ=db=m~å~ãÉíêáÅëI=ÉñÅÉéí=
ïÜÉêÉ=éÉêãáííÉÇ=Äó=ä~ïK=cçê=áåÑçêã~íáçå=~ÇÇêÉëëW=db=m~å~ãÉíêáÅëI=OON=`êÉëÅÉåí=píêÉÉí=
t~äíÜ~ãI=j~ëë~ÅÜìëÉííëI=MOQRPI=rp^K
líÜÉê=éêçÇìÅí=å~ãÉë=ãÉåíáçåÉÇ=áå=íÜáë=ÇçÅìãÉåí=ã~ó=ÄÉ=íê~ÇÉã~êâë=çÑ=íÜÉáê=êÉëéÉÅíáîÉ=
Åçãé~åáÉëI=~åÇ=~êÉ=ãÉåíáçåÉÇ=Ñçê=áÇÉåíáÑáÅ~íáçå=éìêéçëÉë=çåäóK
mêáåíÉÇ=áå=íÜÉ=råáíÉÇ=pí~íÉë=çÑ=^ãÉêáÅ~
t~êê~åíó
Warranty
The Model 37DL PLUS Ultrasonic Gage has been designed and manufactured as a
precision instrument. Under normal working conditions it will provide long, trouble-
free service.
Damage in transit: Inspect the unit thoroughly immediately upon receipt for evidence
of external or internal damage that may have occurred during shipment. Notify the
carrier making the delivery immediately of any damage, since the carrier is normally
liable for damage in shipment. Preserve packing materials, waybills, and other shipping
documentation in order to establish damage claims. After notifying the carrier, contact
GE Panametrics so that we may assist in the damage claims, and provide replacement
equipment, if necessary.
GE Panametrics guarantees the Model 37DL PLUS to be free from defects in materials
and workmanship for a period of two years (twenty-four months) from date of shipment.
The warranty only covers equipment that has been used in a proper manner as described
in this instruction manual and has not been subjected to excessive abuse, attempted
unauthorized repair, or modification. DURING THIS WARRANTY PERIOD, GE
PANAMETRICS LIABILITY IS STRICTLY LIMITED TO REPAIR OR
REPLACEMETN OF A DEFECTIVE UNIT AT ITS OPTION. GE Panametrics does
not warrant the Model 37DL PLUS to be suitable for intended use, and assumes no
responsibility for unsuitability for intended use. GE Panametrics accepts no liability for
consequential or incidental damages including damage to property and/or personal
injury.
This warranty does not include the transducer, transducer cable, charger, or battery. The
customer will pay shipping expense to the GE Panametrics plant for warranty repair; GE
Panametrics will pay for the return of the repaired equipment. (For instruments not
under warranty, the customer will pay shipping expenses both ways.)
GE Panametrics offers an optional third year warranty coverage (at an additional cost),
under the same terms, at the time of purchase.
GE Panametrics reserves the right to modify all products without incurring the
responsibility for modifying previously manufactured products. GE Panametrics does
not assume any liability for the results of particular installations, as these circumstances
are not within our control.
THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU
OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED (INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE
OF DEALING OR USAGE OR TRADE.)
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV`
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
q~ÄäÉ=çÑ=`çåíÉåíë
Table of Contents
Warranty
Table of Contents
List of Tables
List of Figures
1 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.1 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.2 About this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.3 Audience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.4 Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.5 Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.6 If You have Documentation Comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1.7 Revision History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.8 Technical Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2 Defining Basic Gage Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

2.1 Summarizing Keypad Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2 Identifying Display Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.3 Using the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.4 Monitoring the Battery Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.5 Charging the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.6 Replacing the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.7 Using AA Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3 Set Up Calibration with D79X Series Dual Element Transducers . . . . . . . 33

3.1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.2 Making Thickness Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.3 Calibrating with D79X Series Dual Element Transducers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
3.3.1 Transducer Zero Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.3.2 Material Velocity and Zero Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.3.2.1Material Velocity Calibration of a Material of Unknown Sound
Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.3.2.2Enter a Known Material Sound Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.3.3 Zero Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.4 Performing a Thru-Coat Calibration Using D7906 and D7908 Transducers. . . . 39
3.4.1 Thru-Coat (Material Only) Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.4.2 Thru-Coat (Material and Coating) Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV`
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
4 Setting Up and Calibrating with EMAT Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

4.1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.2 Calibration with the E110-SB EMAT Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.2.1 Material Velocity and Zero Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.2.2 Material Velocity of a Material of Unknown Sound Velocity. . . . . . . . 45
4.2.3 Entering a Known Material Sound Velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.2.4 Zero Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.2.5 Making Adjustments to the Transducer Parameters When Using the
E110-SB EMAT Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5 Set Up and Calibration with Single Element Transducers. . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

5.1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.2 Choosing a Default or User-Defined Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
5.3 Making Thickness Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
5.4 Calibrating with Single Element Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
5.4.1 Velocity and Zero Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
5.4.2 Velocity Calibration Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5.4.3 Zero Calibration Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
5.5 Adjusting the Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
5.6 Operating the Delay Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.7 Operating the Zoom Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.7.1 Zoom for D79X Dual Element Transducers and Mode 1 Single
Element Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
5.7.2 Zoom with Single Element Transducers in Mode 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.7.3 Zoom with Single Element Transducers in Mode 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
6 Setting Up and Calibrating for the Measurement of Boiler Tubes and Internal
Oxide Scale Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.1 Steam Boiler Tube Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.2 Activating the Internal Oxide Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
6.3 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6.4 Calibration for the Boiler Tube and Internal Oxide Thickness Measurements . . 66
6.4.1 Material Velocity, Zero and Oxide Velocity Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.4.2 Entering a Known Material and Internal Oxide Sound Velocity. . . . . . 68
7 Managing Special Gage Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

7.1 Selecting a Differential Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7.2 Using the Fast Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.3 Using the Minimum Thickness Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
7.4 Using the Maximum Thickness Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
7.5 Managing High/Low Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.5.1 Standard Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
7.5.2 Previous Thickness Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.5.3 B-Scan Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
7.6 Changing the Thickness Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

7.7 Managing the Calibration Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
7.8 Freezing Waveforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
8 Managing Setup Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

8.1 Managing the Measurement Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
8.1.1 Beeper Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
8.1.2 Inactive Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
8.1.3 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
8.1.4 Radix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
8.1.5 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
8.1.6 Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
8.1.7 Hold/Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
8.1.8 Rectification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
8.1.9 Waveform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
8.1.10 Backlight Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
8.1.11 Supervisor Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
8.1.12 Save Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
8.1.13 ID Overwrite Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
8.2 Operating the B-Scan/DB Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
8.3 Using Avg/Min Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
8.4 Operating Temperature Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
8.5 Managing the Communications Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
8.6 Managing Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
8.6.1 Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.6.2 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.6.3 Hardware Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.6.4 Error Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
8.7 Operating Gage Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8.7.1 Measurement Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8.7.2 Communications Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
8.7.3 DBase Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
8.7.4 Master Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.8 Using the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
8.9 Licensed Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
8.10 Oxide Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
8.11 Adjusting Display Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
9 Using Advanced Gaging Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

9.1 Setting the Manual Gain Adjust with a D79X Series and E110, EMAT
Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
9.2 Using Automatic Gain Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
9.2.1 Return to Default Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
9.2.2 Restore the Previous Automatically Optimized Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV`
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
9.3 Adjusting the Extended Blank with D79X Series Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
9.4 Using the Echo-to-Echo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
9.4.1 Automatic Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
9.4.2 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
9.4.3 Blanking Adjustments in Manual Echo-to-Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
9.4.4 Return to Normal Measurement Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
9.4.5 Transducer Usage in Echo-to-Echo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
9.4.6 Echo-to-Echo Mode Datalogger Flags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
9.5 Operating the B-Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
9.5.1 Display Half B-Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
9.5.2 Display Full B-Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
9.5.3 Enable the B-Scan Alarm Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
9.5.4 Save B-scans, A-Scans, or Thickness Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
9.6 Using the Grid View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
9.6.1 Display Half Database Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
9.6.2 Display Full Database Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
9.6.3 Save Thickness Readings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
9.6.4 Grid Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
9.7 Operating the Thru-Coat Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
9.8 Reading Avg/Min Measurements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
9.9 Managing Temperature Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
10 Managing the Datalogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

10.1 Understanding the Datalogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10.2 Organizing the Datalogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10.2.1 File Name Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10.2.2 Identifier (ID Number) Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
10.2.3 File Name Header Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10.2.4 Comment Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
10.3 Creating Data Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
10.3.1 Standard Editing Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
10.3.2 Create Files from a Computer (using the optional WIN37DL PLUS). 133
10.3.3 Create Files from the Model 37DL PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
10.3.3.1Incremental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10.3.3.2Sequential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.3.3.3Sequential with Custom Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
10.3.3.42-D Matrix Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.3.3.52-D Matrix Grid with Custom Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10.3.3.63-D Matrix Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
10.3.3.7Boiler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
10.4 Opening a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
10.5 Copying a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
10.6 Deleting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
10.7 Editing/Renaming a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
10.8 Creating or Editing Comment Tables from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

10.9 Creating or Editing Comment Tables from the Model 37DL PLUS . . . . . . . . . 167
10.9.1 Delete Comments from a Comment Table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
10.9.2 Copy a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
10.9.3 Database Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
10.10 Saving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
10.10.1 Save Thickness Readings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
10.10.2 Save Thickness and Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
10.10.3 Save Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
10.11Using the Review ID Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
10.12 Using the Edit ID Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
10.13 Erasing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
10.13.1 Erase Data in the Active/Open File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
10.13.2 Erase a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
10.13.3 Erase the Entire Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
10.14 Using the Optional Bar Code Wand to Enter an ID Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
10.15Generating Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
11 Custom Setups for Single Element Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

11.1 Managing the Detect Mode Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
11.2 Defining a Setup Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
11.3 Defining Measurement Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
11.4 Defining a Probe Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
11.5 Varying Pulser Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
11.6 Adjusting Maximum Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
11.7 Adjusting Initial Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
11.8 Adjusting TDG Slope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
11.9 Adjusting the Main Bang Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
11.10Adjusting the Echo Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
11.10.1 Echo 1 Detect and Echo 2 Detect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
11.10.2 Interface Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
11.10.3 Mode 3 Echo Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
11.10.4 Setup Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
11.10.5 Save Setup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
12 Managing Communications/Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

12.1 Transmitting Data to a Computer or Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
12.1.1 Send Entire Files from Gage to Computer or Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
12.1.2 Sending a Specific Range of ID Numbers from a Specific File . . . . . 201
12.1.3 Perform a Single Send of the Current Displayed Measurement
Data to a Computer or Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
12.1.4 Send a Snapshot from the Model 37DL PLUS to a Computer . . . . . . 202
12.1.5 Send a Snapshot from the Model 37DL PLUS to a Printer . . . . . . . . . 202
12.2 Receiving (Downloading) Files from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV`
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
12.3 Uploading/Downloading a Stored Transducer Setup to a Computer . . . . . . . . . 204

12.4 Setting Up Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12.4.1 RS-232 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
12.4.2 Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
12.5 Identifying Data Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
12.6 Performing a Communication Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
12.7 Using the WIN37DL PLUS Interface Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
13 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the Model 37DL PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

13.1 Providing Routine Gage Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
13.2 Maintaining Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
13.3 Understanding Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
13.4 Resolving Battery and Charger Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
13.5 Resolving Measurement Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
13.6 Performing Diagnostic Self Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
13.6.1 Keypad Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
13.6.2 Video Display Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
13.6.3 Hardware Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
13.6.4 Error Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Appendix A - Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Appendix B - Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Appendix C - Sound Velocities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Appendix D - Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Appendix E - Data Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Appendix F - Remote Control Via RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Appendix G - Accessories and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Documentation Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

iáëí=çÑ=q~ÄäÉë
List of Tables
Table 1 Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Table 2 Revision History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Table 3 Keypad Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Table 4 Oxide Measure Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Table 5 Calculating a Low/High Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 6 Calculating a Percent Thickness Alarm Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Table 7 Measurement Reset Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Table 8 Recommended Transducers for Steel Using Echo-to-Echo Mode. . . . . . . . . . . 112
Table 9 DtectMode and EchWindow Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Table 10 Computer or Printer Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Table 11 Model 37DL PLUS Dual Element Transducer Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Table 12 Model 37DL PLUS Single Element Transducer Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Table 13 Information Displayed on the Model 37DL PLUS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Table 14 Setup Name and Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Table 15 Setup Parameter Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Table 16 Sound Velocities of Various Materials (Longitudinal Wave Velocity) . . . . . . . 239
Table 17 Equipment Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Table 18 Standard 37DL PLUS I/O Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Table 19 Model 37DL PLUS Dual Element Transducer Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Table 20 Model 37DL PLUS Single Element Transducer Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Table 21 Flag Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Table 22 Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Table 23 Accessories and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV`
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
iáëí=çÑ=cáÖìêÉë
List of Figures
Figure 1 Model 37DL PLUS Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Figure 2 Identifying Display Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Figure 3 Initial Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 4 Changing Measurement Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Figure 5 Opening the Thru-Coat Setup Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Figure 6 Transducer and Filter Adapter Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Figure 7 Viewing the Model 37DL PLUS Transducer Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Figure 8 Initial Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Figure 9 Selecting a Stored Transducer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 10 Naming Convention Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Figure 11 Reading Thickness Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Figure 12 Displaying the Waveform Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Figure 13 Comparing Normal Display to Zoom in Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Figure 16 Steel/Oxide Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Figure 17 Disbonded Oxide Layer Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 18 SP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Figure 19 Viewing the Model 37DL PLUS Transducer Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Figure 20 SP Mode Selection Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 21 Oxide Measure Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Figure 22 Normal Differential Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Figure 23 Percent Ratio Differential Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 24 Viewing the Normal and % Ratio in the Differential Setup Screen. . . . . . . . . . . 70
Figure 25 Viewing the Thickness Display in Fast Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Figure 26 Displaying the Minimum Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Figure 27 Identifying MIN Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Figure 28 Displaying the Maximum Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Figure 29 Referencing the Low Alarm Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Figure 30 Referencing the High Alarm Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 31 Selecting Alarm Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Figure 32 Displaying the Previous Thickness Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Figure 33 Entering Loss/Growth Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Figure 34 Changing Resolution Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Figure 35 Selecting Beeper Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Figure 36 Selecting Inactive Time Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Figure 37 Selecting Language Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Figure 38 Selecting Radix Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 39 Selecting Units Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Figure 40 Selecting Resolution Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 41 Selecting Hold/Blank Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Figure 42 Selecting Rectification Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV`
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 43 Displaying a Waveform Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Figure 44 Selecting Waveform Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Figure 45 Selecting Backlight Mode Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Figure 46 Selecting Supervisor Lock Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Figure 47 Selecting Save Key Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 48 Selecting ID Overwrite Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Figure 49 Saving Measurements with Overwrite Protection Activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Figure 50 Selecting the Communications Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Figure 51 Changing the Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Figure 52 Selecting the DBASE Tracking Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Figure 53 Warning Prompt for Measurement Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Figure 54 Warning Prompt for Communication Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Figure 55 Warning Prompt for Dbase Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Figure 56 Warning Prompt for Master Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Figure 57 Selecting Clock Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Figure 58 Viewing Changes in the Default Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Figure 59 Viewing the Blank Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Figure 60 Selecting the Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 61 Selecting the Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Figure 62 Comparing Manual Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Figure 63 Selecting the Normal Measurement Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Figure 64 Changing B-Scan Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Figure 65 Analyzing a B-Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Figure 66 Defining the Freeze Review Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Figure 67 Changing DB Grid Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 68 Displaying Reverse Grid Rows Off (Ascending). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 69 Displaying Reverse Grid Rows On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Figure 70 Displaying Reverse Grid Columns Off (Ascending) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 71 Displaying Reverse Grid Columns On (Descending) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 72 Displaying Transpose Grid Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 73 Displaying Transpose Grid On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 74 Displaying Grid IDS in Linear Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Figure 75 Viewing the Data Cell Flag Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Figure 76 Opening the Avg/Min Measure Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Figure 77 Viewing the Display Screen with Avg/Min Measurement Active. . . . . . . . . . . 123
Figure 78 Replacing a Avg/Min Measurement Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Figure 79 Opening Temp Compensation Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Figure 80 Displaying Temperature Compensation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Figure 81 Identifying Datalogger Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Figure 82 Creating a File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Figure 83 Creating a Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Figure 84 Organization of Character Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Figure 85 Selecting the Create Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Figure 86 Selecting a File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
iáëí=çÑ=cáÖìêÉë
Figure 87 Selecting an Incremental File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Figure 88 Enter Incremental File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Figure 89 Selecting a Sequential File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Figure 90 Entering Sequential File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Figure 91 Selecting a Sequential with Custom Point File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Figure 92 Entering Sequential with Custom Point File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Figure 93 General Grid Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Figure 94 One Grid for 75 Identical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Figure 95 Different Named Grid for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 96 Selecting a 2D Grid File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Figure 97 Entering 2D Grid File Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Figure 98 Selecting a 2-D Grid with Custom Points File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Figure 99 Entering 2D Grid with Custom Points File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Figure 100 Selecting a 3-D Grid with Custom Points File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Figure 101 Entering 3D Grid File Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Figure 102 Selecting a Boiler File Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Figure 103 Entering Boiler File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Figure 104 Selecting Open Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Figure 105 Opening a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Figure 106 Selecting the Copy Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 107 Copying a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Figure 108 Selecting the Delete Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 109 Deleting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Figure 110 Deleting an Active File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Figure 111 Selecting the Edit-Rename Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 112 Entering New File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Figure 113 Displaying the Grid Edit Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Figure 114 Entering Information for the Comment Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Figure 115 Selecting the Note-Copy Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Figure 116 Selecting a Note to Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Figure 117 Selecting a Comment from the Notes Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Figure 118 Identifying the Review ID Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Figure 119 Enabling the ID Edit Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Figure 120 Example of Screen if Edited ID is Not in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Figure 121 Selecting the Resets Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Figure 122 Selecting the DBase Reset Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 123 Warning Message when Resetting DBase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Figure 124 Selecting the Reports Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Figure 125 Selecting the File Summary with Stats Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 126 Selecting a File to View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Figure 127 Viewing File if Min/Max Summary is Selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Figure 128 Reviewing the Min/Max Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Figure 129 Viewing File if File Comparison is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Figure 130 Reviewing the Comparison Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV`
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 131 Viewing File if Alarm Report is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Figure 132 Reviewing Alarm Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Figure 133 Detect Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Figure 136 Pulser Power Set to 30 Volts Shows a Smaller Initial Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Figure 137 Pulser Power Set to 110 Volts Shows a Larger Initial Pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Figure 138 Maximum Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Figure 139 Initial Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 140 TDG Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Figure 141 Main Bang Blank Position for Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 142 Main Bang Blank Position for Mode 2 and 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Figure 143 Echo Window Setting for Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Figure 144 Echo Window Setting for Mode 2 and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Figure 145 Negative Detection Steel Back by Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 146 Positive Detection Plastic Bonded to Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Figure 147 Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 148 Mode 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Figure 149 Gage Hanging up on Trailing Edge of Backwall 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Figure 150 M3Blank Set Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Figure 151 Adjusting the Setup Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Figure 152 Displaying Recall Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Figure 153 Saving Recall Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Figure 154 Selecting the Send Option from the File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 155 Selecting a File to Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Figure 156 Identifying a Range of ID Numbers to Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Figure 157 Selecting the Communication Option from the Setup Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . 206
Figure 158 Viewing Communication Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Figure 159 Viewing the Communication Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Figure 160 Selecting the Resets Option from the Setup Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 161 Selecting Communications Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 162 Warning Prompt for Communication Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Figure 163 Viewing the Hardware Status Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Figure 164 Dual Transducer Sound Paths when Measuring Material Thickness. . . . . . . . . 218
Figure 165 Received Transducer Waveform when Measuring a Material Thickness . . . . . 218
Figure 166 Model 37DL PLUS Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Figure 167 Positioning the Transducer on Test Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Figure 168 Usual Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Figure 169 Special Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
mêÉÑ~ÅÉ
1 Preface
The preface provides the following introductory topics:
• Product Description
• About this Document
• Audience
• Typographic Conventions
• Related Documentation
• If You have Documentation Comments
• Revision History
• Technical Help
1.1 Product Description

The GE Panametrics Model 37DL PLUS is a hand-held ultrasonic thickness gage
designed primarily for corroded metal applications. An integral A-Scan display allows
waveform verification simultaneous with a thickness read-out. An advanced internal
datalogger allows storage of 60,000 thickness measurements and 4,500 waveforms. Plus,
a two way serial RS-232 communications connector allows the gage to interface with
printers and computers.
The Model 37DL PLUS is capable of using both single element and dual element
transducers to measure the thickness of corroded, pitted, scaled, granular, and other
difficult materials from one side only. You can also use single element or dual element
transducers for echo-to-echo measurements. A full line of transducers are available to
measure materials between 0.005" (0.50mm) and 25" (500mm) thickness with material
temperatures between -20°C to +500°C (-4°F to 932°F) depending on material,
transducer, and measurement mode. Moreover, the Model 37DL PLUS uses a
microprocessor that continuously adjusts the receiver setup so that every measurement is
optimized for reliability, range, sensitivity, and accuracy.
The Model 37DL PLUS also offers many advanced measurement features, A-Scan and B-
Scan display options, and internal datalogging functions.
Advanced Measurement Features:
• Thru-coat measurement
• Boil tube scale algorithm
• Temperature compensated measurement
• Min/Average mode
• Emat transducer capability
• Measurement related status flags and alarms
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
• LCD with selectable backlight for highly readable information under all lighting
conditions
• Automatic probe recognition for the standard D79X and MTD705 series transducers
• Calibration for unknown material velocity and/or transducer zero
• Echo-to-echo measurements
• Fast Scan mode with 20 readings/sec.
• Manual Gain Adjust in 1db steps
• Hold or Blank thickness display during loss of signal (LOS) conditions
• “Hold minimum or maximum” reading modes with MinFinder
• Differential thickness display relative to setpoint in absolute or percent ratio
• Calibration lockout function
• Selectable resolution 0.001" (0.01mm) or 0.01" (0.1mm)
A-Scan and B-Scan Display Options:

• Real-time A-Scan waveform display for verification of critical measurements
• Manual Freeze mode with post processing
• Manual Zoom and Range control of waveform display
• Auto Hold on LOS and Auto Zoom (measured echo centering)
• Extended Blank
• Blank after first received echo in echo-to-echo mode
• Receiver Gain read-out
• Ability to capture and display waveform associated with minimum thickness during
scanned measurements
• Display stored and downloaded waveforms
Internal Datalogger Functions:

• Capacity to store 60,000 fully documented thickness readings or 4,500 waveforms
with thickness readings
• Database enhancements include 32 character file naming, 20 character ID naming
EPRI formatting, and dynamic grid sizing
• ID numbers increment automatically, follow a preset sequence, or can be set from the
keyboard
• Save reading/waveform at an ID number
• Simultaneously show filename, ID number, stored comments, and stored reference
thickness while displaying active thickness and waveform
• Seven file formats available
NU
mêÉÑ~ÅÉ
• Erase selected data or all stored data

• Save or send a held or frozen reading on the thickness display
• Transmit selected data or all stored data
• Keyboard programmable communication parameters
1.2 About this Document

This document is the Instruction Manual for the Model 37DL PLUS. The Instruction
Manual describes routine tasks for operating the Model 37DL PLUS. These tasks include
operating the Model 37DL PLUS, configuring system parameters, managing system
functions, calibrating the Model 37DL PLUS with single and dual element transducers,
managing special gage functions and advanced gaging features, using the datalogger,
transmitting files, and maintaining the gage.
1.3 Audience
This document is intended for any operator using the Model 37DL PLUS. GE
Panametrics recommends that all operators have a thorough understanding of the
principles and limitations of ultrasonic testing. We assume no responsibility for incorrect
operational procedure or interpretation of test results. We recommend that any operator
seek adequate training prior to using this equipment. GE Panametrics offers a full range of
training courses including Level I and Level II Ultrasonic Testing, Advanced Detection
and Sizing, and Ultrasonic Thickness Gaging. For further information regarding training
courses, contact GE Panametrics.
1.4 Typographic Conventions

The following notes and table provide a list of the typographic conventions that appear in
this document.
Warning: This information indicates danger and the possibility of personal

injury.
Caution: This information indicates that loss of data or equipment damage can occur.
Note: This information provides explanatory information.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Tip: This information provides helpful guidelines for easy operation.
Convention Description
Courier Font Used for file names, lines of code, names of

processes, and commands.
Heavy courier Used for command line user input.
Bold Used for textual parts of graphical user
interface, including menu items, buttons,
toolbar names, modes, options, and tabs.
Italics Used for screen/window names, dialog
boxes and document titles.
Bold Italics Used for emphasis.
[Bold] (Square Brackets with Used for instrument keys on the keypad.
Bold)
<Italics> (Angle Brackets) With italics text, used for variable data.
→ Used for showing the next sequential step.
Table 1 Typographic Conventions
1.5 Related Documentation

The Model 37DL PLUS works with the WIN37DL PLUS Interface Program. For more
information about this software program, refer to the following instruction manual:
• WIN37DL PLUS Interface Program, Part Number 910-249A
1.6 If You have Documentation Comments

GE Panametrics is always interested in improving its documentation. We value your
comments about this manual and other GE Panametrics documentation.
Simply fill out the survey at the back of this manual and send your documentation
comments to GE Panametrics by using one of the following methods:
• Send comments to GE Panametrics, NDT Marketing Department, 221 Crescent
Street, Waltham, Massachusetts 02453, Attention: Technical Publications
• Fax us at 781-899-1552, Attention: Marketing Department/Technical
Publications
OM
mêÉÑ~ÅÉ
In all your correspondence, please include the title of the document, its part number,
release date, and the specific section upon which you are commenting.
1.7 Revision History

This document may require updating because of corrections or changes to the product.
Publication dates, printed on the front cover, are updated when a change is made to this
document. In addition, the document number is also changed to reflect the revision.
The table below shows a list of all revisions for this document.
Date Issue Release version
May 2003 910-239A First release (preliminary).

June 2003 910-239B Second release.
October 2003 910-239C Revision
Table 2 Revision History
1.8 Technical Help

Call GE Panametrics, NDT division at 800-225-8330 (within the USA) or 781-899-2719
(outside the USA) and ask for a sales engineer to assist you.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` ON
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
OO
aÉÑáåáåÖ=_~ëáÅ=d~ÖÉ=léÉê~íáçå
2 Defining Basic Gage Operation

This chapter describes how to get started using basic Model 37DL PLUS operations.
Topics are as follows:
• Summarizing Keypad Functions
• Identifying Display Elements
• Enabling Auto Power Off
• Using the Battery Pack
• Monitoring the Battery Charge
• Charging the Battery Pack
• Replacing the Battery Pack
• Using AA Batteries
2.1 Summarizing Keypad Functions
Figure 1 Model 37DL PLUS Keypad
The figure above shows the full keyboard layout. The following table lists all the
keystroke functions available from the Model 37DL PLUS keyboard and is divided into
two groups. The first group consists of single keystroke functions and the second group
consists of multiple keystroke functions, which are shown grouped together and must be
pressed sequentially on the gage.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Key Key Color Function
Green Power On/Off - Turns the

gage on and off.
Yellow Zero - Compensates for

transducer zero or enables
step block zero calibration.
Yellow Cal - Switches the gage into

the semi-automatic step block
Calibration mode.
Yellow Velocity - 1) Displays and

enables changing the sound
velocity calibration for a
particular material. 2) In ID
Edit mode only, [VEL]
deletes the character at the
cursor.
Note: When using Thru-Coat,

press [VEL] twice to view
and set the coating velocity.
Yellow Numeric Keys - Enters
numeric values from
- 0-9.
Red Measurement/Reset -
Completes the current
operation and switches the
gage to Measurement mode.
Blue Range - Changes the
waveform display range to the
next available value.
Blue Zoom - 1) Changes the

waveform display range so
that the region immediately
surrounding the measured
echo is shown at maximum
magnification. 2) In the ID
Edit mode only, [ZOOM]
inserts a blank space at the
cursor.
Table 3 Keypad Definitions
OQ
Blue Freeze - Causes the displayed

waveform to immediately
hold until reset.
Orange Backlight - Controls the

waveform display backlight.
Gray Enter - Used to select

highlighted items and accept
entered values.
Green Up Arrow - 1) Adjusts the
value of a selected parameter
upward. 2) Selects the next
higher entry in a chosen list.
Green Down Arrow - 1) Adjusts the
value of a selected parameter
downward. 2) Selects the next
lower entry in a chosen list.
Green Left Arrow - 1) Lowers the
value of a selected parameter.
2) Moves the character and
highlights the cursor one
space to the left during the ID
Edit mode.
Green Right Arrow - 1) Increases
the value of a selected
parameter. 2) Moves the
character and highlights the
cursor one space to the right
during the ID Edit mode.
Brown File - Opens File Options
dialog box where you can
manage files using the
following functions: open,
create, copy, delete, send,
edit/rename, note/copy, and
reports.
Brown Save - Stores measurements/
waveforms in the datalogger
at the current ID number.
Table 3 Keypad Definitions (Continued)
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Tan Send - Initiates transmission

of stored data to a computer or
printer.
Tan ID number (Identification

Number) - Allows access to
several functions related to
changing ID numbers.
Gray 2nd F - When pressed with a
key that has dual functions
(the main function written on
the key; the secondary
function written above the
key), the secondary function
becomes active.
Multiple Keypress Functions
Gray Setup Mode - Allows user to
modify gage parameters and
perform special test functions.
Options in the Setup mode
Yellow include:
• Measurement
• B-Scan/DB Grid
• Avg/Min Measure
• Temp Compensation
• Communication
• Diagnostics
• Resets
• Clock
Gray Extended Blank - Prevents
erroneous measurements
from occurring within an
“extended blank” period,
which you can set using the
Yellow waveform display.
Gray Recall Setup - Recalls a

single element transducer
setup.
Yellow
OS
Gray Fast - Increases the

measurement and thickness/
waveform display update rate
from 4 per second up to 20 per
second.
Yellow
Gray Min/Max Measure - Selects

Min Meas mode, Max Meas
mode, or Default Meas mode.
Yellow
Gray Status - Shows an

information screen with the
following data:
1) Software version
Yellow 2) Available memory
Gray Temperature - Allows you to

enter the current material
temperature allowing the gage
to compensate for changes in
sound velocity using the
Blue Temp Compensation feature.
Gray Alarm - Views, enables, and

allows changing alarm
setpoints.
Yellow
Gray Differential - Views, enables

and allows changing the
differential reference value.
Yellow
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Yellow Calibration Lock - Controls

the calibration key lock when
you press [6] and [3]
simultaneously.
Yellow
Gray Waveform - Stores a

measurement and waveform
in the datalogger at the current
ID number.
Orange
Gray Print - Prints an image of the

display including the
waveform with the current
thickness.
Tan
Gray Note - Allows you to create or

select comments to store at an
ID number location.
Tan
Gray Clear Memory - Acts as an

alternative method to erase an
entire file. Also used to erase a
range of data in a file or a
Tan single ID number location.
Gray Delay - Adjusts the beginning

of the waveform display to
some other value to help
center echoes that are further
out in time.
Blue
OU
Gray Opt - Allows you to input a

known thickness of material
and the gage automatically
optimizes the gain for a D79X
dual element transducers.
Orange
2.2 Identifying Display Elements

The gage screen is a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and best viewed from straight above or
slightly below the surface rather than from the side. The display may be slower at
temperatures below 32oF (0oC). The figure below identifies the various sections of the
Model 37DL PLUS display.
File Name Comments/ID number
ID Location
Measurement Marker
Stored Thickness
Delay Freeze Flag

Zoom Flag
Gain
Min/Max Rectification
MIN
Finder
Units
Alarm
Measurement
Mode/Update Rate Thickness
Date and Time
Battery Life
Figure 2 Identifying Display Elements
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
General Information: The main function of the display is to show the echo waveform and
to display the thickness reading received by the transducer as measurements are made.
The received echoes are amplified before being shown on the display. The waveform trace
is called the A-Scan display. This type of waveform allows a skilled operator to verify that
the gage signal being used to make a thickness measurement is the correct backwall echo
and not noise, material anomaly, or the second multiple echo. This verification waveform
along with all pertinent calibration information can be stored with the thickness value in
the internal datalogger. If you are an experienced operator, you can also use the echo
waveform to learn more about the quality of the measurement than is given just by the
thickness value, which includes observation of indications that may be too small to be
measured by the gage.
Press [FREEZE] to freeze the display. Adjust the thickness range (horizontal scale) or
expand the measured echo by using the Zoom mode.
When operating in the Minimum or Maximum Measurement mode, the waveform
associated with a minimum or maximum reading is internally captured and recalled to the
screen when the transducer is uncoupled. Furthermore, any waveform that is stored in the
datalogger memory can be shown on the waveform display for review or comparison to
the current measured waveform. Such recalled waveforms may have been recently saved
or may have been downloaded from a computer data file.
Thickness Display: The top portion of the display shows the current Filename, ID
number, Comments, and any previous stored thickness values.
The lower part of the display functions as a general purpose thickness measurement
display where it acts as a control panel for calibrating and setting up the gage in addition
to displaying status conditions, error messages, and warnings. The large characters are
used to show numerical values such as thickness and velocity. This area also shows flags
that describe the numeric data and/or the gage operating modes, and the battery status.
2.3 Using the Battery Pack

The Model 37DL PLUS gage is powered by an internal 6V battery pack using
rechargeable NiCad batteries or 6 AA alkaline batteries. The NiCad battery pack is
recharged through the Model 36CA PLUS Charger/AC Adapter unit that is supplied with
the gage. The 36CAPLUS does not recharge the alkaline batteries; you must replace the
alkaline batteries after discharging. The Model 37DL PLUS can also be operated directly
from AC power using the Charger/Adapter.
The batteries are fully charged when shipped, but for maximum operating time, recharge
before using. Recharge batteries only with the Model 36CA PLUS Charger/Adapter
supplied with the gage. Other chargers may reduce battery life and/or damage the
battery and void the warranty on the gage.
Even a discharged battery maintains the internal stored calibration values and thickness
data for several weeks. However, do not leave discharged batteries for long periods of
time in order to maintain optimum battery life.
PM
2.4 Monitoring the Battery Charge

The gage operates for at least 25 hours between charges under normal conditions (when
FAST mode is off and the backlight is off). The battery charge indicator, or battery status
meter, displays the percentage of battery remaining capacity in bottom right hand corner
of the display. Remember that if the battery is charged for at least 2 hours, then 99% charge
indication corresponds to over 25 hours of operation. However, if the battery is charged
for less than 2 hours, then 99% charge indication corresponds to proportionally fewer
hours of operation. When there is insufficient battery charge, the gage automatically
powers off to prevent damage to the battery.
Note: The battery charge indicator shows a rotating bar when the charger is
plugged in, however it does not indicate when a full charge is reached. The
gage displays a “C” indicating that the battery is charging. The gage displays
a “S” indicating that charging is complete.
2.5 Charging the Battery Pack

The gage operates for at least 25 hours between charges under normal conditions (4Hz
measure update rate in Mode 1 with the Backlight turned off.) The current battery status is
always indicated in the lower right corner of the gage display. This indicator shows a
percentage of the battery charge remaining. The maximum percentage that can be
displayed is 99%. (See Monitoring the Battery Charge on page 31.)
When the battery is insufficiently charged, the gage automatically powers off to prevent
damage to the battery. Recharge the battery using the Model 36CA PLUS charger.
To charge the NiCad battery pack, plug the 36CA PLUS AC Charger Adapter into an
appropriate source of AC power, and plug the cable from the Charger/Adapter into the
charger socket on the top of the gage. The battery recharges whether the gage is OFF or
ON. Do not attempt to use the battery charge indicator to determine when batteries
have reached full charge. For a fully discharged battery, allow approximately 2 hours to
fully recharge. You can use the gage for normal measurements while the Charger/AC
Adapter is connected with little effect on the recharge time.
2.6 Replacing the Battery Pack

After several hundred recharges, the NiCad batteries lose the ability to hold a full charge.
To replace an old battery pack with a new battery pack, follow these steps:
1. Open the battery panel on the back of the gage case by loosening the four captive
screws.
2. Remove the battery, once the case is open, by gently pulling the black strap at the right
end of the battery.
3. Remove the plug that connects the wire from the battery pack to the circuit board of
the gage.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` PN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
4. Connect the new battery pack, and install with the label side facing outward.
5. Replace the battery panel and tighten the screws.
Note: The internal memory is maintained for over an hour when the battery is
removed. If a new battery is installed in less than an hour, no calibration or
thickness data is lost.
2.7 Using AA Batteries

Non-rechargeable alkaline batteries are available for use with the Model 37DL PLUS.
To replace the NiCad Rechargeable batteries with alkaline batteries, follow these steps:
1. Remove the NiCad pack.

2. Insert 6 “AA” Alkaline batteries into the alkaline battery holder that is provided.
3. Connect the Alkaline battery holder to the gage using the same connector as the NiCad
pack.
4. Place the Alkaline holder into the battery compartment.
5. Replace the battery panel and tighten the screws.
Note: It is also possible to charge the Nicad battery outside of the Model 37DL
PLUS using a special external battery charger adapter. Contact GE
Panametrics for more information about external battery charging.
PO
pÉí=ré=`~äáÄê~íáçå=ïáíÜ=aTVu=pÉêáÉë=aì~ä=bäÉãÉåí=qê~åëÇìÅÉêë
3 Set Up Calibration with D79X Series Dual

Element Transducers
This section demonstrates how to make basic thickness measurements using dual element
transducers with the Model 37DL PLUS. The unit ships from the factory set up with
default conditions for the transducer(s) you have purchased using an approximate sound
velocity for the stainless steel test block provided with the gage. You can change Setups
easily after becoming familiar with the more sophisticated features of the gage. The
default conditions are selected to facilitate gage usage for your applications. This section
contains a detailed explanation of these default conditions.
• Getting Started
• Making Thickness Measurements
• Calibrating with Dual Element Transducers
• Performing a Thru-Coat Calibration
3.1 Getting Started

To setup the Model 37DL PLUS for the first time, use the test block included with the gage
and the default settings, and follow these steps:
1. Plug the transducer into the connector on top of the 37DL PLUS case.
Note: The transducer cable connector must be positioned with center pin down.
When unplugging a transducer, pull ONLY on the molded plug, do
NOT pull the cable.
2. Press [ON/OFF] to power on the gage. Do NOT couple the transducer to the test piece
yet.
The message “do—” appears on the thickness display. This message means that the
gage requires the following transducer ZERO compensation steps to automatically
compensate for the current transducer delay line length.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` PP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 3 Initial Display Screen
3. Wipe all couplant from the tip of the transducer.

4. Press [ZERO].
The current units are indicated on the right of the thickness display in either inches
(IN) or millimeters (MM).
Figure 4 Changing Measurement Units
To change the measurement units, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd], [0] (Setup).

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to select measurement. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to select units.
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the English or Metric option.
5. Press [MEAS].
You are now ready to make measurements based on the default calibration and
settings.
PQ
Note: The steps above are not a substitute for performing a proper calibration. The
default calibration is an approximate calibration for the stainless steel test
block included with the gage. Generally, it yields results that are better than
95% accurate. However, for greatest accuracy perform both a velocity and
zero calibration for the test material. (See Material Velocity and Zero
Calibration on page 36.)
3.2 Making Thickness Measurements

To begin making thickness measurements, follow these steps:
1. Apply couplant to the test block or material at the spot to be measured.

In general, smooth material surface allows for using thinner couplants such as
propylene glycol, glycerin, or water. Rough surfaces require more viscous couplant
such as gel or grease. Special couplants are required for high temperature
applications.
2. Press the tip of the transducer to the surface of the test material. Use moderate to firm
pressure and keep the transducer as flat as possible on the material surface.
3. Read the material thickness on the thickness display.
Note: For highest accuracy, you must perform both a velocity and zero calibration.
(See Material Velocity and Zero Calibration on page 36.)
3.3 Calibrating with D79X Series Dual Element

Transducers
Calibration is the process of adjusting the gage so that it measures accurately on a
particular material, using a known transducer at a given temperature. The Model 37DL
PLUS calibration procedure falls into the following three categories:
• Transducer Zero Compensation: Calibrate for the sound transit time in each of the
dual transducer delay lines. This compensation varies in each unit and with
temperature. You must perform the Transducer Zero Compensation procedure when
the unit is powered on, when the transducer is changed, and when the transducer
temperature changes significantly.
• Material Velocity Calibration (Cal Vel): Perform a Cal Vel using a thick test block of
the measured material with known thickness or by entering the previously determined
material velocity manually. You must perform this procedure for each new measured
material.
• Zero Calibration (Cal Zero): Perform a Cal Zero using a thin test block of the
measured material with known thickness. Unlike the Transducer Zero Compensation
and the Cal Vel, this procedure is not required unless you need the best absolute
accuracy (better than ± 0.004" or ± 0.10mm), and you only need to do it once for each
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` PR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
new transducer and material combination. You do not have to repeat the Cal Zero
when the transducer temperature changes; Transducer Zero Compensation is
responsible for that task. (See Transducer Zero Compensation on page 36.)
3.3.1 Transducer Zero Compensation

Perform a Transducer Zero Compensation whenever the message “do—” and the ZERO
flag are shown on the thickness display (do ZERO). Additionally, you should also
perform this procedure when the transducer temperature has changed significantly.
To perform a Transducer Zero Compensation, follow these steps:
1. Wipe any couplant from the transducer face.

2. Press [ZERO].
The new zero calibration value appears briefly before returning to the Measurement
mode. The zero calibration value is for reference only; it cannot be directly entered or
altered.
Note: When measurements are made on surfaces that are significantly above room
temperature, the zero should be recalibrated on a regular basis. This is less
important for transducers Part Number D790(SM), D791(RM), D797(SM),
and D798 than for the remaining transducers that have various types of resin
delay lines. Typically, there is very little change in sound transit time in the
delays used in D790(SM), D791(RM), D797(SM), and D798 compared with
the delays used in the other transducers provided for use with the Model
37DL PLUS.
The frequency that you perform a Zero Compensation procedure depends on the rate of
change of the internal temperature of the transducer. This is related to the material surface
temperature, frequency of transducer application, length of time the transducer is held in
contact with the material, and the accuracy that you want to obtain. For high temperature
measurements, GE Panametrics recommends that you develop a schedule for Zero
Compensation that takes these factors into account. For example, use the D790(SM),
D791(RM), or D797(SM) for high temperature applications, minimizing the frequency of
the Zero Compensation. (You can also use the D790(SM) and D791(RM) for general
purpose applications.) After Zero Compensation, periodically check the accuracy of the
measured thickness by using a test block that is the same material and thickness as the
material being tested, and make sure the temperature is also the same.
3.3.2 Material Velocity and Zero Calibration

You can use a thick calibration block and a thin calibration block of the same material
when you are performing a Material Velocity and Zero Calibration procedure.
Note: You can also achieve a Material Velocity and Zero Calibration procedure by
performing the operation in reverse, for example perform a Cal Zero first and
then a Cal Vel.
To perform a Material Velocity and Zero Calibration procedure, follow these steps:
PS

2. Press [ZERO].
3. Couple the transducer to the thick calibration block and press [CAL].
4. Press [VEL] when the thickness reading is stable.
5. Uncouple the transducer and enter the thickness of the thick block using the numeric
keypad.
6. Couple the transducer to the thin block and press [CAL].
7. Press [ZERO] when the reading is stable.
8. Uncouple the transducer and enter the thickness of the thin block using the numeric
keypad.
9. Press [MEAS/RESET] to complete the calibration and go to the Measurement
mode.
Note: If there is a long-beep from the gage before returning to the Measurement
mode and “Calibration Error Message” appears on the display, then an error
occurred in the calibration procedure — the velocity will NOT be changed.
It is probable that the thickness value entered was incorrect.
3.3.2.1 Material Velocity Calibration of a Material of Unknown Sound Velocity

To perform the Material Velocity Calibration, you must use a calibration block made from
the same test material to be measured. The test block should be as thick as the thickest
section that you are going to measure. Also, make sure the test block is smooth and has
parallel front and back surfaces. The thickness of the block must be known exactly.
To perform a Material Velocity Calibration, follow these steps:

2. Press [ZERO].
3. Couple the transducer to the block and press [CAL].
4. Press [VEL] when the thickness reading is stable.
The gage will not accept [VEL] if the LOS flag is enabled, which indicates an
inadequate transducer signal level.
5. Uncouple the transducer and enter the thickness of the standard using the numeric
keys.
You can correct an entry error by pressing [0] several times and then entering the
correct value.
6. Press [MEAS/RESET] to complete the calibration and return to Measurement
mode.
If you power off the gage before pressing [MEAS/RESET], the velocity will NOT be
updated to the new value; instead the gage will retain the previous “current” value.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` PT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
You can press [VEL] following a Velocity Calibration (or at any time from the
Measurement mode) in order to read and record the material velocity for the material.
When measuring to this material in the future, you can enter this velocity directly from the
keyboard without using the test block.
Note: Sound velocity in all materials changes with temperature. For maximum
accuracy, the calibration block should be at approximately the same
temperature as the samples to be measured unless you are using the
temperature compensation feature.
3.3.2.2 Enter a Known Material Sound Velocity

When preparing to measure a different material of known sound velocity, you can enter
the velocity directly without doing a Cal Vel procedure.
To enter material velocity when the velocity is known, follow these steps:
1. Press [VEL] from the Measurement mode. The current velocity appears.
2. Enter the new velocity using the numeric keys.
correct value.
3. Press [MEAS/RESET] to complete the entry and return to the Measurement mode.
3.3.3 Zero Calibration

You must use a calibration block of the material to be measured when preparing to do a
Zero Calibration. The block should be as thin as the thinnest section of the test material to
be measured. If the surface of the test material to be inspected is rough, then roughen the
surface of the calibration block to simulate the actual surface to be measured. Rough
surfaces generally reduce the accuracy of measurements, but simulating actual surface
conditions on the calibration block can help to improve results. The exact thickness of the
sample must be known.
To perform a Zero Calibration, follow these steps:

2. Press [ZERO].
3. Couple the transducer to the test block.
4. Press [CAL].
PU
5. Press [ZERO] when the thickness reading is stable.

The gage will not accept [ZERO] if the LOS thickness display flag is enabled, which
indicates an inadequate transducer signal.
6. Uncouple the transducer and enter the thickness of the standard using the numeric
keys.
correct value.
7. Press [MEAS/RESET] to complete the calibration and return to the Measurement
mode.
3.4 Performing a Thru-Coat Calibration Using D7906

and D7908 Transducers
Thru-Coat is a special feature that measures the true metal thickness of coated or paint
materials. This feature only requires a single back wall echo and is recommended for
applications on heavy corrosion where the outside of the material is painted. The Thru-
Coat feature is available with D7906 and D7908 transducers only.
When you power up the unit with a Thru-Coat transducer or change to one of the Thru-
Coat transducers, the gage prompts you with a message “Zero DO—”.
To setup Thru-Coat parameters, follow these steps:
1. Wipe the couplant from the transducer face.

2. Press [Zero]. The Thru-Coat Setup dialog box opens.
THRU COAT SETUP

THRU COAT ENABLE oOFF n ON
COATING THK DISPLAY oOFF n ON
OK CANCEL
Figure 5 Opening the Thru-Coat Setup Dialog Box
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to select On or Off from the Thru-Coat Enable option. Press

[ENTER].
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` PV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select On or Off from the Coating THK Display option. Press
[ENTER].
On: Displays the material thickness and the Coating thickness at the same time.
Off: Ignores the thickness of the coating, displaying the true metal thickness.
5. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the OK button. Press [ENTER].
The gage enters the Thru-Coat Measurement screen and is ready to take thickness
measurements.
3.4.1 Thru-Coat (Material Only) Calibration

Use the steps below if you chose to not show the coating thickness or if you want to use a
default velocity value for the coating. We recommend that you perform the Thru-Coat
(Material and Coating) Calibration in order to achieve the best accuracy of the coating
thickness.
To perform a Thru-Coat (Material only) calibration, follow these steps:
1. Couple the transducer to a thick calibration block. Press [CAL] while you are in the
Thru-Coat Measurement mode.
2. Press [VEL] when the reading is stable.
3. Uncouple the transducer from the material and enter the thickness of the block using
the numeric keypad.
4. Couple the transducer to a thin calibration block. Press [CAL].
the numeric keypad.
7. Press [MEAS] to complete the calibration.
3.4.2 Thru-Coat (Material and Coating) Calibration

Use the steps below if you chose to show the coating thickness and want to calibrate for the
sound velocity of the coating. This calibration provides the best accuracy of the coating
and material thickness.
Note: This calibration requires two samples of known thickness of the material to
be tested and a coated sample where the coating thickness is known.
To perform a Thru-Coat (Material and Coating) calibration, follow these steps:
1. Couple the transducer to a thick calibration block. Press [CAL] while in the Thru-
Coat Measurement mode.
2. Press [VEL] when the reading is stable.
the numeric keypad.
QM
4. Couple to the transducer to a thin calibration block. Press [CAL].

the numeric keypad. Press [CAL].
7. Couple the transducer to a coated sample when the reading is steady and press [VEL].
8. Uncouple the transducer and enter the thickness of the coating using the numeric
keypad.
9. Press [MEAS] to complete the calibration.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` QN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
QO
pÉííáåÖ=ré=~åÇ=`~äáÄê~íáåÖ=ïáíÜ=bj^q=qê~åëÇìÅÉêë
4 Setting Up and Calibrating with EMAT

Transducers
This section provides background information regarding EMAT transducers and how to
make basic thickness measurements using the 37DL PLUS and the E110-SB transducer.
An EMAT (Electro Magnetic Acoustic Transducer) uses the Magnetostrictive Principle
to generate shear wave sound energy in ferrous metals that are externally coated with high
temperature oxide scale. The E110-SB transducer will not work on nonferrous metal or in
cases where the external surface is not coated with oxide scale. The EMAT transducer
uses the external scale to generate shear wave sound energy and does not require the use of
ultrasonic couplant. If the scale is not fully bonded to the surface of the steel, the shear
wave sound energy will not be transmitted into the wall.
The EMAT transducer is an effective way of determining the estimated thickness of steel
boiler tubes without removing the external scale. Initial thickness measurements with an
EMAT transducer can determine if the wall is already below its specified minimum
thickness, thus saving the time that would have been spent removing the external oxide
from a boiler tube that will ultimately be replaced.
The EMAT transducer creates a non-focused signal and is designed to give a good
estimate of the remaining (+/-0.010” or +/-0.25 mm) wall thickness. Because of the non-
focused nature of the transducer, it is relatively insensitive to small internal pits. The
minimum thickness measurement capability of the 37DL PLUS and EMAT transducer is
approximately 0.080” (2.0mm) depending on material properties.
Removing the external oxide and using a standard single or dual element transducer will
always provide a more accurate thickness measurement of remaining metal than
measurements made with an EMAT transducer. Focused dual element transducers are
also more sensitive to any internal pitting.
4.1 Getting Started

1. To use the E110-SB EMAT transducer with the 37DL PLUS, the user must employ a
special 1/2XA/E110 filter adapter box. The 1/2XA/E110 filter adapter must be
connected to the transducer connectors located at the top of the 37DL PLUS. The
E110-SB can then be connected to the 1/2XA/E110 adapter box using a standard
Lemo to BNC cable (part number LCB-74-4).
2. Connect the transducer and filter adapter as shown in Figure 6.
3. Press [On/Off] to power on the gage.
4. The E110-SB EMAT transducer is now ready to make thickness measurements on
steel material with high temperature oxide scale using the default transducer setup.
For best accuracy it is recommended that the 37DL PLUS be calibrated using samples
with external scale and known wall thicknesses.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` QP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 6 Transducer and Filter Adapter Connection
4.2 Calibration with the E110-SB EMAT Transducer

Calibration is the adjustment of the gage so that it measures accurately on a particular
material.
4.2.1 Material Velocity and Zero Calibration

The default velocity and zero offset for the E110-SB EMAT transducer are designed to
provide a good estimate of the ferrous metal thickness underneath an external oxide scale
coating. In order to achieve the best accuracy, calibration samples with external oxide
scale should be made from the material to be tested. These samples should have a metal of
known thickness (not including external oxide scale) and should represent the minimum
and maximum of your measurement range.
To perform a material velocity and zero calibration, follow these steps:
1. Couple the EMAT transducer to your thick sample with external oxide scale and a
known metal wall thickness. Press [CAL].
2. When the thickness reading is stable, press [VEL]. The gage will not accept [VEL] if
the LOS flag is enabled, which indicates an inadequate transducer signal level.
QQ
3. Uncouple the transducer and enter the known thickness of the standard using the
numeric keys. You can correct an entry error by pressing [0] several times and then
entering the correct value.
4. Couple the EMAT transducer to your thin sample with external oxide scale and a
known metal wall thickness and press [CAL]
5. Press [ZERO] when the thickness reading is stable. The gage will not accept [ZERO]
if the LOS flag is enabled, which indicates an inadequate transducer signal level.
7. Press [MEAS/RESET] to complete the calibration and return to Measurement Mode.
If you power off the gage before pressing [MEAS/RESET], the velocity and zero will
NOT be updated to the new values; instead, the gage will retain the previous current
value.
Mode and “Calibration Error Message” appears on the display, then an error
occurred in the calibration procedure.
Note: You can press [VEL] following a velocity calibration (or at any time from
the Measurement mode) to read and record the material velocity for the
material. When measuring this material in the future, you can enter the
velocity directly from the keyboard without using the test block.
temperature as the samples to be measured unless you are employing
temperature compensation.
4.2.2 Material Velocity of a Material of Unknown Sound Velocity

Use the following procedure to measure the material velocity of a material of unknown
sound velocity:
1. Couple the EMAT transducer to your thickness sample with external oxide scale and
a known metal wall thickness.
2. Press [CAL].
3. Press [VEL] when the thickness reading is stable. The gage will not accept [VEL] if
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` QR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
value.
Note: If there is a long beep from the gage before returning to Measurement Mode
and “Calibration Error Message” appears on the display, then an error
the Measurement mode) to read and record the material velocity for the
material. When measuring this material in the future, you can enter this
velocity directly from the keyboard without using the test block.
temperature as the samples to be measured unless you are employing
temperature compensation.
4.2.3 Entering a Known Material Sound Velocity

When preparing to measure a different material of known sound velocity, you can enter
the velocity directly without employing the CAL VEL procedure:
1. Press [VEL] from Measurement mode. The current velocity appears.

2. Enter the new velocity using the numeric keys. You can correct an entry error by
pressing [0] several times and then entering the correct value.
3. Press [MEAS/RESET] to complete the entry and return to Measurement mode. If
you power off the gage before pressing [MEAS/RESET], the velocity will NOT be
updated to the new value; instead, the gage will retain the previous current value.
4.2.4 Zero Calibration

You must use a calibration block of the material to be measured that is coated with
external oxide scale when doing a Zero Calibration. The block should be as thin as the
thinnest section of the test material to be measured. The exact thickness of the metal under
the oxide coating must be known. Use the following procedure:
QS
1. Couple the EMAT transducer to your thin sample with external oxide scale and a
known metal wall thickness.
2. Press [CAL].
3. Press [ZERO] when the thickness reading is stable. The gage will not accept [ZERO]
if the LOS flag is enabled, which indicates an inadequate transducer signal level.
value.
Note: If there is a long beep from the gage before returning to Measurement Mode
and “Calibration Error Message” appears on the display, then an error
4.2.5 Making Adjustments to the Transducer Parameters When Using the

E110-SB EMAT Transducer
When used with the E110-SB and 1/2XA/E110 filter adapter, the 37DL PLUS will
automatically recall the default setup DEF-EMAT/E110 from the default single element
transducer list.
This is a special single element transducer setup that allows the transducer parameters to
be changed in two ways:
1. Full control of all the transducer parameters : To have full access to all transducer
adjustments, the user can employ the Setup Adjust function. This function allows
adjustment of all transducer parameters in the same manner as with any single element
transducers (using [2nd F], [2](SETUP ADJ). Refer to Setup Adjust and Save Setup
Parameters for more information on making changes and storing custom setups.
Note: Adjustments to the single element transducer parameters should be made

only by a qualified technician familiar with the basic theory of ultrasonic
gaging and the interpretation of ultrasonic waveforms.
2. Control over the Gain and Extended blank: In most cases, it is not necessary to make
changes to most of the transducer parameters. It is however likely that the Gain and
Extended Blank may need to be adjusted to make proper EMAT transducer thickness
measurements. From Measurement mode, the user can make adjustments to the Gain
and Extended Blank in the same manner as with any of the D79X Dual element
transducers.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` QT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
QU
pÉí=ré=~åÇ=`~äáÄê~íáçå=ïáíÜ=páåÖäÉ=bäÉãÉåí=qê~åëÇìÅÉêë
5 Set Up and Calibration with Single

Element Transducers
This section demonstrates how to make basic thickness measurements using single
element transducers with the Model 37DL PLUS. The unit ships from the factory with
default settings for the transducer(s) you have purchased using an approximate sound
velocity for the stainless steel test block provided with the gage. You can change setups
easily after becoming familiar with the more sophisticated features of the gage. The
default conditions are selected to facilitate gage usage for your applications. This section
contains a detailed explanation of these default conditions.
• Getting Started
• Making Thickness Measurements
• Choosing a Default or User-Defined Setup
• Calibrating with Single Element Transducers
• Adjusting the Range
• Operating the Delay Function
• Operating the Zoom Mode
5.1 Getting Started

To setup the Model 37DL PLUS for the first time, use the test block included with the gage
and the default settings, and follow these steps:
1. Plug the single element transducer cable into the transducer connector (labelled #1 in
the figure below) on top of the Model 37DL PLUS case.
#1 Used for Single

Element Transducers
Charger RS-232
Display Side #2 Used with Dual

Element Transducers
Figure 7 Viewing the Model 37DL PLUS Transducer Connectors
2. Connect the transducer to the other end of the cable if it is not already connected.
3. Press [ON/OFF] to power on the gage.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` QV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 8 Initial Display Screen
The current units are indicated on the right of the thickness display in either inches
(IN) or millimeters (MM).
The gage is now ready to make measurements based on the default settings and the test
block provided with the gage.
Note: The procedure mentioned above is not a substitute for doing a proper
calibration.
5.2 Choosing a Default or User-Defined Setup

The Model 37DL PLUS uses a wide variety of transducers through the Application Recall
feature. Stored within the gage are 16 pre-defined and 10 user-defined application setups
that provide maximum flexibility for a wide range of applications. The pre-defined setups
always remain in the gage as defaults and cannot be removed. This section discusses how
to choose an appropriate stored transducer setup and how to calibrate the Model 37DL
PLUS for a specific application.
To select a stored transducer setup, follow these steps:
1. Select a transducer for the desired application and connect it to the gage.
Note: See Appendix B - Technical Specifications on page 225 to determine an

appropriate transducer. See Table 14 on page 233; use it as a guideline only
because exact thickness ranges vary depending on the application.
2. While the gage is in the Measurement mode, press [2nd F], [3] (RECALL SU).
RM
Figure 9 Selecting a Stored Transducer Setup
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to scroll through the available stored setups until the correct setup
for the application is highlighted. Below is an example of a default setup naming
convention and a complete list of available stored setup choices:
D E F M 1 - 2 0 . 0 / M 1 1 6
Default Mode:
Mode 1
Mode 2 Probe Part
Mode 3 Number
Material: Frequency
M-Metal
P-Plastic
Figure 10 Naming Convention Sample
Available stored setup choices:

ACTIVE
DEF1-20.0/M116
DEF1-10.0/M112
DEF1-5.0/M110
DEF1-5.0/M109
DEF1-2.25/M106
DEF1-2.25/M1036
DEFM2-15.0/V260
DEFM3-15.0/V260
DEFM2-20.0/M208
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` RN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
DEFM3-10.0/M208
DEFM2-10.0/M202
DEFM3-10.0/M202
DEFM2-5.0/M201
DEFM3-5.0/M201
DEFM2-5.0/M206
DEFM2-2.25/M207
USER -1
USER-2
USER-3
-
-
-
USER-10
Note: You can rename the setups listed as USER-1 through USER-10 for special
applications. (See Custom Setups for Single Element Transducers on page
185.)
4. Press [MEAS/RESET] once the correct setup is highlighted. This action

automatically recalls the setup parameters for the chosen setup and brings you back to
the Measure screen.
5. Begin taking measurements.
5.3 Making Thickness Measurements

To begin making thickness measurements, follow these steps:
1. Apply couplant to the test block or material at the location to be measured.
In general, smooth material surfaces allow the use of thinner couplants such as
propylene glycol, glycerin, or water. Rough surfaces require more viscous couplant
such as gel or grease. See Appendix E - Data Output Format on page 243 for a list of
available couplants.
2. Press the transducer to the surface of the material to be measured. Use moderate to
firm pressure and keep the transducer as flat as possible on the material surface.
3. Read the material thickness on the gage display.
RO
Figure 11 Reading Thickness Measurement
Note: For highest accuracy, you must perform both a velocity and zero calibration.
(See Velocity and Zero Calibration on page 54.)
5.4 Calibrating with Single Element Transducers

Calibration is the process of adjusting the gage prior to testing to a known reference value
for a specific material and transducer. Calibrating the gage is always necessary before
measuring specific material by one of the methods described below. Remember, the
gage’s measurement accuracy is only as good as the calibration that is performed.
The Model 37DL PLUS calibration procedure falls into one of the following three
categories:
• Velocity and Zero Calibration
• Velocity Calibration Only
• Zero Calibration Only
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` RP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Note: This note is applicable for the following three sections beginning on page 54,
page 55, and page 56.
· If a mistake is made or any problem is experienced during the calibration,
press [MEAS/RESET] and return to Step 1.
· After completing Step 2, if the prompt CAL LOCK appears on the
bottom of the display instead of CAL, then unlock the calibration by
following the steps below:
- Press [MEAS/RESET].
- Press [6] and [3] simultaneously.
- The gage will beep and display a message, CAL LOCK is off at the
bottom of the gage.
- Repeat steps 1 and 2.
Caution: Save all changes made to Active Setups. Unsaved data will be lost when a
different application setup is recalled.
5.4.1 Velocity and Zero Calibration

Velocity and Zero Calibration find both sound velocity and zero offset when you do not
know either of these elements. This calibration process requires two pieces of test material
of known thickness values, which are within the measurement range of both the
transducer and setup specifications. See Table 14 on page 233 for more information.
One of the test materials must be thicker than the other. The thicker piece, used to measure
velocity, should be equal to or greater than the upper range of thickness to be measured.
The thinner piece, used for the zero offset, should be equal to or less than the lower range
of minimum thickness to be measured.
To calibrate for the thickness range represented by these test samples, follow these steps:
1. Power on the gage and wait for the Measure screen display.
2. Place a drop of couplant on the surface of the thicker material sample, and couple the
transducer to the sample using moderate to firm pressure. A thickness reading appears
on the display while the LOS prompt in the upper right corner of the display
disappears.
3. Press [CAL] when a stable reading is on the display and the LOS prompt is not on the
screen. Observe the CAL (calibration) prompt on the display.
4. Remain coupled to the standard test piece and ensure that there is still a stable reading
on the display. Press [VEL]. A prompt appears on the display: “Enter value for thick
standard”.
5. Remove the transducer from the sample. The thickness value remains on the display.
RQ
6. Using the numeric keys on the gage, enter the actual known thickness of the test
material.
Continue with the following steps:
1. Put a drop of couplant onto the thin material sample and couple the transducer to it
using moderate to firm pressure.
2. Press [CAL]. A thickness reading appears on the display.
3. Remain coupled to the test piece and ensure that there is a stable reading on the
display. Press [ZERO]. A prompt appears on the display: “Enter value for this
sample”.
5. Using the numeric keys, enter the actual known thickness of the test material.
6. Press [MEAS/RESET] to finalize the calibration.
Note: You can Lock the calibrated readings to ensure that it is not accidentally
changed. (See Managing the Calibration Lock on page 81.) From the
Measurement mode, press [3] and [6] simultaneously. The gage displays a
message: “CAL LOCK is on...”.
5.4.2 Velocity Calibration Only

Use the Velocity Calibration Only procedure when the gage is calibrated for a particular
transducer/material combination, and that same transducer is used with a different
material and sound velocity. The procedure requires test material of known thickness,
equal to or greater than the upper range of thickness to be measured.
To calibrate for the thickness range represented by this test sample, follow these steps:
1. Power on the gage and wait for the Measure screen display. Make sure the correct
single element transducer setup is recalled.
2. Place a drop of couplant on the surface of the test material, and couple the transducer
to the sample using moderate to firm pressure. A thickness reading appears on the
display while the LOS prompt in the right corner of the display disappears.
3. Press [CAL] when a stable reading is on the display and the LOS prompt is off. The
gage displays a message: “Couple to standard; press VEL or ZERO”.
4. Remain coupled to the test piece and ensure that there is still a stable reading on the
display. Press [VEL]. A prompt appears on the display: “Enter value for thick
standard”.
6. Use the numeric keys to enter the actual known thickness of the sample being
measured.
7. Press [MEAS/RESET] to finalize calibration.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` RR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Note: You can “LOCK” the calibrated readings to ensure that it is not accidentally
If the sound velocity of the test material is known, then enter the velocity directly.
To enter a known velocity, follow these steps:
1. Turn the gage on and wait for the Measure screen.

2. Press [VEL]. The Velocity prompt appears and the gage displays the current sound
velocity.
3. Use the numeric keys to enter the new velocity.
4. Press [MEAS/RESET].
5.4.3 Zero Calibration Only

Use the Zero Calibration Only procedure when the gage is calibrated for a particular
transducer/material combination, but the transducer is replaced and the test material
remains the same. (See Choosing a Default or User-Defined Setup on page 50 if a
transducer is changed to a different type of transducer after calibrating.)
The Zero Calibration Only procedure requires test material of known thickness,
preferably near the lower end of the desired measurement range, but not below the gage’s
minimum measurement range for both the transducer and setup specifications.
To calibrate for the thickness range represented by this test sample, follow these steps:
1. Power on the gage and wait for the Measure screen display. Make sure the correct
single element transducer setup is recalled.
2. Place a drop of couplant on the surface of the material sample, and couple the
transducer to the sample using moderate to firm pressure. A thickness reading appears
on the display while the LOS prompt in the right corner of the display disappears.
3. When a stable reading is on the display and the LOS prompt is off, press [CAL]. The
gage displays a message: “Couple to standard; press VEL or ZERO”.
4. Remain coupled to the test piece and ensure that there is still a stable reading on the
display. Press [ZERO]. A prompt appears on the display: “Enter value for thin
standard”.
6. Use the numeric keys to enter the actual known thickness of the sample being
measured.
7. Press [MEAS/RESET] to finalize the calibration.
RS
Note: You can “LOCK” the calibrated readings to ensure that it is not accidentally
If you know the zero offset number for a particular transducer, enter it directly. See
Velocity and Zero Calibration on page 54 to determine the zero number for a given
transducer and calibrate the gage according to the procedure (See Zero Calibration Only
on page 56 also.) Press [ZERO] to read the zero offset number. Record this number for
each probe for future reference.
Note: You must use the same transducer cable lengths in order to maintain
accuracy of the zero offset number recorded for each probe. This rule is
especially true when using cable lengths over 10 ft. (approximately 3
Meters).
To enter a known zero offset number, follow these steps:
1. Power on the gage and wait for the Measure screen display.
2. Press [ZERO]. The gage displays the prompt: “Enter value for zero”. The gage
displays the zero offset number to which it is presently calibrated.
3. Use the numeric keys to enter the new zero offset.
4. Press [MEAS/RESET] to enter the new zero offset into the gage.
5. Insert oxide.
5.5 Adjusting the Range

The range of the waveform display is the distance spanned by the horizontal axis of the
display in the non Zoom mode. (See Operating the Zoom Mode on page 58.) The left end
of the horizontal-axis is always zero thickness, and the right end is the thickness
representing the endpoint of the range unless the delay is adjusted. There are fixed ranges
available for each transducer frequency. The available ranges are also material velocity
dependent.
These selectable ranges let you adjust the thickness span of the waveform display to
encompass only the thickness range being measured and thus obtain maximum waveform
resolution for each application. The range setting affects the waveform display only. You
can still make measurements even when the display range does not encompass the
thickness being measured.
To change the range at any time the display is active, follow these steps:
1. Press [RANGE]. The waveform range changes to the next higher available range.
2. Continue to press [RANGE] until the desired range is obtained. The range value
recycles to the minimum range value following the maximum range value.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` RT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
5.6 Operating the Delay Function

The Range Delay of the waveform display adjusts the beginning of the horizontal span in
the non Zoom mode. The left end of the horizontal axis is normally set to zero thickness.
The Delay function allows you to adjust the left end of the horizontal axis so the waveform
can be centred over a portion of the waveform that occurs later in time. This function is
very useful when using delay line or immersion transducers, or when measuring thick
material so that the measured echoes can be seen in greater detail.
To operate the Delay function, follow these steps:
1. Press [2ndF], [Range] (DELAY).

2. Press [ ] or [ ] to adjust the waveform Delay.
Figure 12 Displaying the Waveform Delay
Note: Press and hold the [RANGE] key to reset the delay to 0.00.
5.7 Operating the Zoom Mode

The Zoom mode allows the thickness region surrounding the measured echoes to expand
to full screen width. The resulting zoomed waveform depends on the Measurement
mode that the gage is using. The zoom adjusts the Range and Delay so the measured
echoes are on screen are shown in the greatest detail. The Zoom mode also tracks the
measured echoes adjusting the Range and Delay automatically, always keeping the
measured echoes on the waveform screen.
5.7.1 Zoom for D79X Dual Element Transducers and Mode 1 Single Element
Transducers
Zoom for D79X Dual Element transducers and Mode 1 Single Element transducers
centers the first backwall echo on the screen.
RU
Figure 13 Comparing Normal Display to Zoom in Mode 1
5.7.2 Zoom with Single Element Transducers in Mode 2

Zoom with Single Element transducers in Mode 2 adjusts the Waveform Range and Delay
so that the interface echo and first backwall echo are shown on the Waveform screen.
Note: In the Zoom mode, the gage automatically adjusts the Range and Delay to
track the Interface and first backwall echo. If you adjust the Range, the gage
remains at the selected Range and automatically adjusts the Delay to track
the interface echo.
5.7.3 Zoom with Single Element Transducers in Mode 3

Zoom with Single Element transducers in Mode 3 adjusts the Waveform Range and Delay
so that the interface echo and second measured backwall echoes are shown on the
Waveform screen.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` RV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Not Zoomed Zoomed
Note: In Zoom mode, the gage automatically adjusts the Range and Delay to track
the Interface and second backwall echo. If you adjust the Range, the gage
remains at the selected Range and automatically adjusts the Delay to track
the interface echo.
SM
pÉííáåÖ=ré=~åÇ=`~äáÄê~íáåÖ=íÜÉ=PTai=mirp=Ñçê=íÜÉ=jÉ~ëìêÉãÉåí=çÑ=_çáäÉê=qìÄÉë=~åÇ=fåíÉêå~ä=lñáÇÉ
pÅ~äÉ=jÉ~ëìêÉãÉåí
6 Setting Up and Calibrating the 37DL

PLUS for the Measurement of Boiler
Tubes and Internal Oxide Scale
Measurement
This section provides background information regarding the measurement of boiler tubes
and internal oxide scale. This optional feature allows the user to measure both the
thickness of the boiler tube and the thickness of the internal oxide scale at the same time.
Both thickness values can be stored in the internal datalogger and uploaded to the
WIN37DLPLUS interface program.
6.1 Steam Boiler Tube Scale

The very high temperatures found inside steam boilers (in excess of 1000o Fahrenheit or
500o Celsius) can cause the formation of a specific type of hard, brittle iron oxide called
magnetite on the inside and outside surfaces of steel boiler tubing. At very high
temperatures, water vapor will react with the iron in the steel to form magnetite and
hydrogen according to the formula: 3 Fe + 4 H20 = Fe3O4 + 4 H2.
The speed of this reaction increases with temperature. Oxygen atoms will diffuse inward
through the magnetite layer, and iron atoms will diffuse outward, so that scale continues to
grow even after the tube surface is completely covered.
Magnetite scale acts as thermal insulation on the pipe, since the thermal conductivity of
scale is approximately 3% that of steel. When heat no longer radiates efficiently from the
flame through the tube and into the steam within, the tube wall heats to temperatures
beyond intended operating range. Long term exposure to overly high temperatures,
combined with the very high pressure inside the tube, leads to intergranular micro-
cracking in the metal and to creep deformation (slow swelling or bulging of the metal),
which in turn eventually leads to tube failure.
The growth of magnetite scale and associated metal damage are primary limiting factors
for boiler tube service life. The process begins slowly and then accelerates, for as the scale
grows thicker, the tube wall becomes hotter, which in turn increases the rate of both scale
growth and metal damage. Studies in the power generation industry indicate that the effect
of scale is relatively insignificant up to thicknesses of approximately 0.012" or 0.3 mm,
but that beyond that thickness, the negative effects of scale increase rapidly. Measurement
of scale thickness allows a plant operator to estimate remaining tube service life and to
identify and replace tubes that are approaching the failure point. Ultrasonic testing with
instruments such as the GE Panametrics Model 37DL PLUS provides a quick and
nondestructive method for measuring scale.
The 37DL Plus is designed to measure the thickness of metal boiler tubes and the
thickness of oxide scale that has built up on the inside. The figure below shows the correct
ultrasonic signals using the single element transducer default setup DEF-OXIDE/M2017.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` SN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Note: To achieve accurate boiler tube and internal oxide scale thickness readings,
it is important that the external surface of the boiler tube be free of external
oxide scale.
Figure 16 Steel/Oxide Echo
The gage will make a standard Mode 2 measurement from the delay line echo (surface of
the boiler tube) to the echo from the inside of the oxide layer (total back wall echo). When
in Oxide Layer mode, the gage will center the data window on the detected total back wall
echo and then search for the steel/oxide interface echo in the data window. An oxide echo
marker will indicate the detected steel/oxide interface echo. The gage will calculate the
time of flight for the sound travel through the steel boiler tube and the time of flight
through the internal oxide layer. The gage uses these time measurements to calculate the
thickness of the steel and the thickness of the oxide. The unit can be calibrated to use two
different sound velocities for each of these measurements. In the setup menu for the Oxide
Layer option, the user can display the thickness of the material and oxide layer in thickness
units (in./mm) or in time of fight (µsec).
The minimum internal oxide thickness that the 37DL PLUS can measure is approximately
0.010” (0.25mm) depending on the material sound velocity. The 37DL PLUS will display
only the thickness of the steel boiler tube if the internal oxide scale thickness is below the
minimum measurement capability or if it is exfoliated (disbonded) from the inside of the
boiler tube. The figure below shows a waveform from a sample in which the internal oxide
layer is disbonded from the boiler tube. Because the oxide is disbonded, sound energy will
not travel into the internal oxide layer, and a single reflected echo from the inside of the
boiler tube will be shown. The waveform when the internal oxide is thinner than 0.010”
(0.25mm) will look almost identical. The steel/oxide interface will be so close in time to
the echo from the inside of the oxide that it cannot be separated from the total back wall
echo and will produce a single echo.
SO
Figure 17 Disbonded Oxide Layer Waveform
6.2 Activating the Internal Oxide Software

If the Internal Oxide option is purchase with a new 37DL PLUS, then the optional
software will already be loaded and activated on the unit. When this feature is activated, a
selection for Oxide Measurement will appear in the SP Mode selection menu as shown
below:
Figure 18 SP Mode
Contact your local GE Panametrics representative for information on how to purchase the
optional internal oxide software. If the software was purchased after the unit was initially
supplied, then the 37DL PLUS will need to be upgraded with the internal oxide software,
and the feature will have to be activated using a unique license name and license name
code system.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` SP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Each 37DL PLUS will generate a unique license name. To activate the internal oxide
feature, the user must enter a valid license code. Contact GE Panametrics or our local GE
Panametrics representative to obtain a valid license code for the license name. This license
code is not valid for any other 37DL PLUS unit.
After the internal oxide software is upgraded to the instrument, you can activate the
software through the following procedure:
1. Press [2ndF], [0] (SETUP). The SP mode selection menu will be displayed.
2. Use the [ ] or [ ] keys to highlight the Licensed Options selection and press
[ENTER]. The Licensed Options screen will be displayed.
3. Enter the License Code provided by GE Panametrics in the license code entry box.
Press [ENTER].
4. Use the [ and ] keys to select DONE or CANCEL and press [ENTER].
Selecting DONE will activate the software feature and return you to the Measure
mode. Selecting CANCEL will exit the software activation screen and return you to
the Measure screen without activating the optional software. The gage will issue an
error message stating that an incorrect license code has been entered.
5. Turn the gage off and then back on again to complete the software activation.
6.3 Getting Started

Once the Internal Oxide software is loaded and activated, you are ready to start making
boiler tube and internal oxide thickness measurements, employing the following
procedure:
1. Connect the M2017 or the transducer to a LCM-74-4 cable. Plug the cable into the
single element transducer connector (#1 below) on top of the Model 37DL PLUS case.
SQ
Figure 19 Viewing the Model 37DL PLUS Transducer Connectors
2. Press [ON/OFF] to power on the gage.

3. Choose the default setup DEF-OXIDE/M2017 or a stored transducer setup for the
transducer you plan to use. While the gage is in Measurement mode, press [2nd F], [3]
(RECALL SU).
4. Press [ ] and [ ] to scroll through the available stored setups until the correct setup
for the application is highlighted and then press the [MEAS] key.
You are now ready to make measurements with the recalled setup. For the best accuracy,
it is recommend that a Velocity and Zero Calibration be performed on samples with
known boiler tube thickness and known internal oxide scale thickness.
6.3.1 Oxide Measure Setup Menu

The Oxide Measure Setup menu for the 37DL PLUS allows the user to select the
measurement units (Thickness or Time of Flight) and the format of the measurements on
the Oxide Measurement screen.
1. From the Standard Measure screen, press [2nd F], [0],(Setup). The SP Mode
selection menu will be displayed.
Figure 20 SP Mode Selection Menu
2. Use the [ ] and [ ] keys to highlight Oxide Measure and press [ENTER]. The
Oxide Measure setup screen will be displayed.
Figure 21 Oxide Measure Setup Screen
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` SR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
3. Use the and [ ] keys to highlight the setting and the [ and ] keys to change
parameters. The table below displays values for the figure above:
Oxide Meas THK: Oxide measurement in TOF: Oxide measurement in time
Type thickness units. units (µsec).
Material Meas THK: Boiler tube measurement in TOF: Boiler tube measurement in
Type thickness units. time units (µsec).
Large Font OXIDE: Measurement for the oxide MATERIAL: Measurement for the
Meas (in large font size) on the Material (Boiler Tube) (in large font
Measurement display. size) on the Measurement display.
Table 4 Oxide Measure Setup Screen

4. Press [MEAS] to return to the Oxide Measure screen with selected settings.
6.4 Calibration for the Boiler Tube and Internal Oxide

Thickness Measurements
Calibration is a process of adjusting the gage so that it measures accurately on a tested
material.
6.4.1 Material Velocity, Zero and Oxide Velocity Calibration

The default velocity and zero offset for the DEF-OXIDE/M2017 setup are designed to
provide a good estimate of the metal boiler tube and internal oxide scale thickness. To
achieve the best accuracy, the 37DL PLUS needs to be calibrated on samples with known
thickness values.
This calibration is done in three steps:
1. Cal Velocity for the boiler tube thickness.

2. Cal Zero for the boiler tube thickness.
3. Cal Velocity for the internal oxide thickness.
This allows the 37DL PLUS to calculate a velocity and zero offset for the boiler tube
measurement and a velocity for the internal oxide. The calibration for the boiler tube
thickness is done on steel samples where the thicknesses of the samples are known and
represent the minimum and maximum of your measurement range. The velocity
calibration for the internal oxide is done using a sample of boiler tube where the thickness
SS
of the internal oxide is known. When the calibration is completed, the gage will store two
different velocity values, one for the steel boiler tube and one for the internal oxide scale.
To perform a Material Velocity and Zero calibration:
Note: This calibration procedure is the same even if you wish to display the boiler
tube and internal oxide scale thickness in time of flight units.
1. Couple the transducer to your thick sample with a known metal wall thickness and
press [CAL].
2. When the thickness reading is steady, press [VEL]. The gage will not accept [VEL] if
3. Uncouple the transducer and enter the known thickness of the standard, using the
4. Couple the transducer to your thin sample of known metal wall thickness and press
[CAL].
5. When the thickness reading is stable, press [ZERO]. The gage will not accept
[ZERO] if the LOS flag is enabled, which indicates an inadequate transducer signal
level.
7. Couple the transducer to the sample boiler tube with a known internal oxide scale
thickness and press [CAL].
8. When the thickness reading is stable, press [VEL]. The gage will not accept [VEL] if
9. Uncouple the transducer and enter the known thickness of the internal oxide scale
using the numeric keys. You can correct an entry error by pressing [0] several times
and then entering the correct value.
10. Press [MEAS/RESET] to complete the calibration and return to the Measurement
mode.
Note: If you power off the gage before pressing [MEAS/RESET], the velocity and
zero will NOT be updated to the new values; instead, the gage will retain the
previous current value.
the Measurement mode) to read and record the material velocity. When
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` ST
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
measuring this material in the future, you can enter this velocity directly
from the keyboard without using the test block.
temperature as the samples to be measured unless you are using temperature
compensation.
6.4.2 Entering a Known Material and Internal Oxide Sound Velocity

If the velocity of the steel boiler tube and the velocity of the internal oxide is known, these
values can be entered directly into the 37DL PLUS without performing the calibration
procedure. Follow these steps:
1. Press [VEL] from Measurement mode. The current material velocity appears (steel
boiler tube velocity).
3. Press [VEL] again. The current internal oxide scale velocity appears.
5. Press [MEAS/RESET] to complete the entry and return to the Measurement mode. If
you power off the gage before pressing [MEAS/RESET], the velocity will NOT be
updated to the new value; instead, the gage will retain the previous current value.
SU
j~å~ÖáåÖ=péÉÅá~ä=d~ÖÉ=cìåÅíáçåë
7 Managing Special Gage Functions

This chapter describes how to operate the Model 37DL PLUS using special functions and
modes. The Model 37DL PLUS has many thickness measurement features. Although the
features outlined in this section are not required for basic thickness operation, they can
make the gage a more versatile instrument.
• Selecting a Differential Mode
• Using the Fast Mode
• Using the Minimum Thickness Mode
• Using the Maximum Thickness Mode
• Managing High/Low Alarms
• Changing the Thickness Resolution
• Managing the Calibration Lock
• Freezing Waveforms
7.1 Selecting a Differential Mode

The Model 37DL PLUS has two Differential modes
• Normal Differential
• Percent Ratio
Normal Differential: Shows the actual thickness along with the difference between the
actual thickness measurement and a user set reference value.
[(Normal Differential) = (Actual Thickness) – (Differential Reference Value)]
The actual thickness appears on the thickness display and the differential thickness
appears in the differential display area. See Normal Differential Mode on page 69.
Active Thickness
Differential Value
Figure 22 Normal Differential Mode
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` SV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Percent Ratio: Shows the actual thickness along with the percent difference from a user
set reference value.
[(Percent Ratio)] = [(Actual Thickness) - (Differential Reference Value)] /(Differential
Reference Value)]*(100)
The actual thickness appears on the thickness display and the Percent Ratio thickness
appears in the differential display area as shown below:
Actual Value
Percent Differential
Figure 23 Percent Ratio Differential Mode
When you press [SAVE] while in Normal Differential mode or Percent Ratio
Differential mode, the actual thickness is saved along with the “D” flag, which indicates
that the Differential mode is active. The reference differential value is also stored in the
setup table.
The units and resolution of the Differential thickness are the same as those selected for the
thickness measurement.
Note: You can use the Differential mode in conjunction with Min/Max mode, but
it cannot be used in conjunction with the Alarm mode.
To activate, view, set, change, or select differential type, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [9] (DIFF) while in the Measurement mode.
Figure 24 Viewing the Normal and % Ratio in the Differential Setup Screen
2. Press [ ], [ ], or [ENTER] to highlight a setting to be changed (Enable, Displayed,

or Ref Value, Large Font, or Former Thickness.)
3. Press [ ], [ ], or [0]-[9] to change the highlighted setting.
TM
4. Repeat steps, beginning with step 1, to change another setting.

5. Press [MEAS/RESET] to return to the Measurement mode with the displayed
Differential settings, or press [2nd F], [MEAS/RESET] at any time to return to the
Measurement mode with the original Differential settings unchanged.
7.2 Using the Fast Mode

The Fast mode thickness display increases the measurement and thickness/waveform
display update rate from 4 per second up to 20 per second. This function is useful when
making high temperature thickness measurement(s) to help limit the transducer contact
time. The Model 37DL PLUS automatically uses Fast mode when entering the Minimum
or Maximum mode.
Figure 25 Viewing the Thickness Display in Fast Mode
Note: The battery charge life, while in Fast mode, is only 65% of the normal rate
life.
To enable or disable Fast mode, follow these steps:
1. Press [2ndF], [4] (FAST) while the Measure, Differential Measure, or Alarm
Measure mode is active.
This mode is indicated by the word “Fast” on the display screen.
2. To exit from Fast mode, press [2ndF], [4] (FAST) again.
7.3 Using the Minimum Thickness Mode

Minimum mode displays the smallest thickness measured from the time you select
Minimum mode or from the time you reset it. Minimum mode is useful when it is
important to determine the thinnest reading obtained while making a series of readings on
a test piece. The fastest display update rate is automatically activated when entering the
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` TN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Minimum mode. When leaving the Minimum mode, the display update rate is restored to
its previous state.
The current thickness is displayed in the main thickness display and the minimum is
displayed in the Min thickness area.
Min Min
Display Active Display Recalled Min
Reading During LOS
Figure 26 Displaying the Minimum Thickness
Note: A false minimum reading can occur when you lift the transducer from the
test piece due to excess couplant, particularly on smooth surfaces, which
causes the gage to read the thickness of a couplant drop as the transducer is
lifted. To avoid this problem, freeze the waveform prior to uncoupling the
transducer by using the Freeze function in conjunction with the Minimum
Thickness mode. Once the transducer is uncoupled, press [FREEZE] again
to unfreeze the display and recall the minimum thickness and waveform.
To select a Min Measure mode from the Measure, Differential Measure, or Alarm
Measure mode, follow these steps:
1. Press [2ndF], [5] (MIN/MAX). The Min thickness displays only when the gage is in
a Min Measure mode.
2. Press [MEAS/RESET] to reset the held minimum value so that the minimum for a
new series of measurements can be found.
The thickness display will blank indicating that the old minimum value is reset.
Saving or sending a minimum reading also resets the minimum value.
3. Press [2ndF], [5] (MIN/MAX) twice to exit from a Min Measure mode and return to
the Measure, Differential Measure, or Alarm Measure mode.
TO
Note: The [2nd F], [5] (MIN/MAX) cycles from Measure, to Min Measure, to Max
Measure, and back to Measure, etc.
7.3.1 Min Finder

The Min Finder indicator provides a graphic indication that helps relocate the position
where a minimum thickness occurred. When the current thickness is equal to the held
minimum reading, the Min Finder displays a full bar.
MIN
Display Active Recalled MIN
Reading during LOS
Figure 27 Identifying MIN Readings
The Min Finder feature is automatically enabled whenever the Minimum Thickness
mode is enabled.
7.4 Using the Maximum Thickness Mode

The Maximum mode displays the greatest thickness measured since the Maximum mode
was selected or since it was reset. The Maximum mode is useful when it is important to
determine the maximum thickness reading obtained while making a series of readings on
a test piece. The fastest display update rate is automatically selected when entering the
Maximum mode. When leaving the Maximum mode the display update rate is restored
to its previous state.
The current thickness is displayed in the main thickness display and the maximum
thickness is displayed in the Max thickness area. The maximum thickness replaces the
main thickness display when the transducer is uncoupled or a Loss of Signal (LOS)
occurs.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` TP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Recalled Max
Active
Thickness
Max Display Max Display
Figure 28 Displaying the Maximum Thickness
Note: A false minimum reading can occur when you lift the transducer from the
test piece due to excess couplant, particularly on smooth surfaces, which
causes the gage to read the thickness of a couplant drop as the transducer is
lifted. To avoid this problem, freeze the waveform prior to uncoupling the
transducer by using the Freeze function in conjunction with the Minimum
Thickness mode. Once the transducer is uncoupled, press [FREEZE] again
to unfreeze the display and recall the minimum thickness and waveform.
To select a Maximum Measure mode from the Measure, Differential Measure, or

Alarm Measure mode, follow these steps:
1. Press [2ndF], [5] (MIN/MAX) twice. The max thickness display shows when the
gage is in a Max Measure mode and the thickness display shows the actual measured
thickness.
2. Press [MEAS/RESET] to reset the held maximum value so that the maximum for a
new series of measurements can be found.
The thickness display will blank indicating that the old maximum value is reset.
Saving or sending a maximum reading also resets the maximum value.
3. Press [2ndF], [5] (MIN/MAX) to exit from a Max Measure mode and return to the
Measure, Differential Measure, or Alarm Measure mode.
Note: The [2nd F], [5] (MIN/MAX) cycles from Measure, to Min Measure, to Max
Measure, and back to Measure, etc.
TQ
7.5 Managing High/Low Alarms

The Model 37DL PLUS has three different alarm modes: Standard Alarm, Previous
Thickness Alarm, and B-Scan. These alarms are audible beeps that warn you when
measurements are below or above the alarm set points.
7.5.1 Standard Alarm

The Standard Alarm feature lets you view and change the Low Alarm Reference Value,
High Alarm Reference Value, and to turn the visual and audible alarm functions ON/OFF.
The Alarm Reference Values are thickness set points that have the current gage units and
resolution. When an Alarm Measure mode is selected, the alarm condition occurs when
any displayed reading (either actual, minimum, or maximum) is either less than the Low
Alarm Reference Value or greater than the High Alarm Reference Value.
The alarm condition is indicated by a flashing alarm flag located in the thickness display
area and a repeated audible beep. See Figure 29 on page 75.
Low Alarm
Indicator
Figure 29 Referencing the Low Alarm Indicator
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` TR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
High Alarm
Indicator
Figure 30 Referencing the High Alarm Indicator
The alarm condition is recorded in the datalogger second status box for all stored
measurements. An A indicates the Alarm mode, an L indicates a low alarm condition, and
an H indicates a high alarm condition. [MEAS/RESET] resets the alarm condition.
To activate, view, set, or change the High/Low Alarms, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [8] (ALARM) while in the Measurement mode.
Figure 31 Selecting Alarm Settings
2. Press [ ], [ ] or [ENTER] to highlight a setting to be changed (Enable, Mode, Lo-

Alarm, or Hi-Alarm).
3. Press [ ], [ ] or [0]-[9] to change the highlighted setting.
4. Repeat steps, beginning with step 1, to change another setting.
5. Press [MEAS/RESET] to return to the Measurement mode with the displayed
Alarm settings, or press [2nd F], [MEAS/RESET] at any time to return to the
Measurement mode with the original Alarm settings unchanged.
TS
Note: Use the Alarm in conjunction with the Minimum/Maximum mode. Alarm
reference values that were entered in one unit system are displayed as the
equivalent value when the alternate units are selected.
7.5.2 Previous Thickness Alarm

The Previous Thickness Alarm provides both an audio and visual alarm if the current
thickness value is outside the alarm set points when compared to the previous thickness
value. In order to use this function, the previously stored file for an inspection must be sent
to or already exist in the Model 37DL PLUS. The alarm uses the previous thickness value
as its reference when determining if the current thickness is a high or low alarm condition.
The alarm condition is indicated by a flashing alarm flag located in the thickness display
area and repeated audio beeps. The alarm condition is recorded in the datalogger second
status box for all stored measurements. An a indicates the Alarm mode, an l indicates a
low alarm, and an h indicates a high alarm condition. [MEAS/RESET] resets the alarm
condition.
Figure 32 Displaying the Previous Thickness Alarm
The Absolute Differential Alarm lets you set a Thickness Loss Alarm Value and a
Thickness Growth Alarm Value. These values are used to compare the current live
thickness value to the previously stored thickness value at each ID number location within
a file. An alarm is indicated if the current thickness value is outside the set limits when
compared to the previous value. If the thickness differential is greater than or equal to the
Thickness Loss Value, a Low Alarm is indicated. If the thickness differential is greater
than the Thickness Growth Value, a High Alarm is indicated.
Example:
Thickness Loss Value: 0.050"
Thickness Growth Value: 0.005"
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` TT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Previous Current Low High

Calculations
Values Thickness Alarm Alarm
0.300" 0.239" Yes No 0.300-0.239 > 0.050"

0.300" 0.316" No Yes 0.316-0.300 > 0.005"
0.300" 0.285" No No 0.300-0.285 < 0.050"
0.300" 0.302" No No 0.302-0.300 < 0.005"
Table 5 Calculating a Low/High Alarm
The Percent Differential Alarm lets you set a Percent Thickness Loss Alarm Value and a
Percent Thickness Growth Alarm Value. These values are used to compare the current
thickness value to the previous thickness value at each ID number location in a file. If the
current thickness value is outside the set percent limits, when compared to the previous
thickness value, an alarm is indicated. If the percent thickness differential is greater than
or equal to the Percent Loss Value a Low Alarm is indicated. If the percent thickness
differential is greater than the Percent Growth Value a High Alarm is indicated.
Example:
Percent Loss Value: 20%
Percent Growth Value: 5%
Previous Current Low High

Values Thickness Alarm Alarm Calculations
0.300" 0.239" Yes No 0.300 – 0.239

--------------------------------- × 100 > 20%
0.300
0.300" 0.316" No Yes 0.300 – 0.239

--------------------------------- × 100 > 5%
0.300
0.300" 0.285" No No 0.300 – 0.285-

-------------------------------- × 100 < 20%
0.300
0.300" 0.302" No No 0.302 – 0.300

--------------------------------- × 100 < 5%
0.300
Table 6 Calculating a Percent Thickness Alarm Value
To activate, view, or change the percent thickness value, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [8] (Alarm) while in the Measurement mode.
TU
Figure 33 Entering Loss/Growth Values
2. Press [ ], [ ], or [ENTER] to highlight the Enable option.

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to turn the alarm on or off. If turning alarm off, then press [MEAS/
RESET]; if not press [ENTER].
The Mode option becomes highlighted.
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select either Standard (Standard Alarm) or Previous Thk
(Previous Thickness Alarm). Press [ENTER].
The Displayed option becomes highlighted.
5. Press [ ] or [ ] to select ABS DIFF (Absolute Differential) or % DIFF (Percent
Differential). Press [ENTER].
The THK-LOSS option becomes highlighted.
6. Enter Value for THK-LOSS (Thickness Loss Value) or % LOSS (Percent Loss
Value) using the numeric keys. Press [ENTER].
The THK-GROWTH option becomes highlighted.
7. Enter THK-GROWTH (Thickness Growth Value) or % GROWTH (Percent
Growth Value). Press [MEAS/RESET].
Now the gage is in the Previous Thickness Alarm mode. When a reading triggers the
alarm the gage responds with a visual alarm condition and an audible beep. Alarm
conditions are stored in the datalogger with the stored data point.
7.5.3 B-Scan Alarm

You can specify low and high alarm reference values to use in B-Scan mode. This feature
allows you to turn the visual and audible alarm functions On and Off. B-Scan Alarm
mode is the same as the Standard Alarm mode except that in B-Scan Alarm mode lines
are shown in the B-Scan grid if the reference values fall within the B-Scan thickness range.
In addition, when B-Scan Alarm mode is enabled, the alarms are operational as you
review B-Scan thicknesses in B-Scan Freeze Review mode.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` TV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
To enable or disable the B-Scan Alarm mode, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [8] (ALARM) while in the Measurement mode.

2. Press [ ] or [ ] to turn the alarm On or Off. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the B-Scan. Press [ENTER].
4. Use the numeric keys to enter the low alarm value. Press [ENTER].
5. Use the numeric keys to enter the high alarm value. Press [ENTER].
6. Press [MEAS/RESET] to return to the Measurement mode with the displayed alarm
settings, or press [2nd F], [MEAS/RESET] at any time to return to the Measurement
mode with the original alarm settings unchanged.
7.6 Changing the Thickness Resolution

The resolution, meaning the number of thickness value digits shown to the right of the
decimal point, can be changed from the keyboard. This option is useful in some
applications where the extra precision of the last digit is not required, or where extremely
rough outside or inside surfaces make the last thickness display digit unreliable. The
resolutions are selectable:
• Standard: (default) 0.001" or 0.01mm
• Low: 0.01" or 0.1mm
The resolution selection affects all displays and data output of values with thickness units.
This includes measured thickness, differential reference value, and alarm set points.
Note: The velocity is always reported with full four digit resolution.
To change the resolution while in the Measurement mode, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SETUP).

2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Measurement Setup option and press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Resolution option.
Figure 34 Changing Resolution Parameters
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select either the Standard or the Low option.
UM
Press [MEAS/RESET] to return to the Measurement mode
7.7 Managing the Calibration Lock

The Calibration Lock feature lets you set the gage so that no calibration values can be
altered, meaning that no parameters can affect the value of the measurement; these include
Velocity and test block Zero. However, when Calibration Lock is active, you can still
view these values, use the Measurement mode, and use the datalogger functions.
To activate the Calibration Lock, do the following:
Press [6] and [3] together while in a Measurement mode.
A lock message appears briefly to indicate that the Calibration Lock is active.
If you press a locked key while the Calibration Lock is active, the message “Cal Lock
is On” appears on the screen.
To deactivate the Calibration Lock, do the following:
While in the Measurement mode press [6] and [3] together again.
A beep indicates that the Calibration Lock is disabled and the gage briefly displays the
message “Cal Lock is Off”.
7.8 Freezing Waveforms

Pressing [FREEZE] stops updating the displayed waveform image and keeps the
waveform and thickness on the display even if you move or remove the transducer. Frozen
waveforms are indicated by a large F in the upper waveform status box. You cannot
change the measurement parameters of a waveform once it is frozen.
To freeze the waveform and thickness display, follow these steps:
1. Press [FREEZE] while making a measurement. A large F in the upper waveform

status box indicates a frozen waveform.
2. Press [FREEZE] again to unfreeze the waveform and thickness display.
Tip: Pressing [MEAS/RESET], [SAVE], or [SEND] also unfreezes the display.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` UN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
UO
j~å~ÖáåÖ=pÉíìé=jçÇÉë
8 Managing Setup Modes

This chapter describes how to use the Setup mode on the Model 37DL PLUS. The Setup
mode contains several adjustable parameters that dictate how the gage performs. To
access the Setup mode, press [2nd F], [0] (SETUP). Use the arrow keys to select any of
the available options.
• Managing the Measurement mode
• Operating the B-Scan/DB Grid
• Using Avg/Min Measure
• Operating Temp Compensation
• Managing the Communications Mode
• Managing Diagnostics
• Operating Gage Resets
• Using the Clock
• Licensed Option
• Oxide Measure
• Adjusting Display Contrast
8.1 Managing the Measurement mode

The Measurement mode is the most commonly used Setup mode. The Measurement
mode lets you access a setup menu that controls global settings concerning the gage
measurement features. You can change any available parameter in the Measurement
mode:
• Beeper
• Inactive Time
• Language
• Radix
• Units
• Resolution
• Hold/Blank
• Rectification
• Waveform
• Backlight Mode
• Supervisor Lock
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` UP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
• Save Key
• ID Overwrite Protection
8.1.1 Beeper Tone

The Beeper Tone is used to signify when a key is pressed and also to provide an audio
signal during an alarm condition.
To enable or disable the Beeper function, follow these steps:

2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Measurement option and press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Beeper.
Figure 35 Selecting Beeper Parameter
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select between Off (inactive) and On (active).

5. Press [MEAS/RESET] to return to the Measurement mode.
8.1.2 Inactive Time

Normally the gage powers off automatically after about six minutes if no key is pressed
and no measurement is made within that time. This is to prevent the battery from running
down if the gage is left unattended for a long period of time without being powered off.
To enable or disable the Inactive Time function, follow these, steps:

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Inactive Time option.
UQ
Figure 36 Selecting Inactive Time Parameter
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select between the On and Off option.

On: The unit powers off automatically after 6 minutes of inactivity.
Off: The unit does not power off automatically. You must manually power off the
gage by pressing [ON/OFF].
8.1.3 Language
The Model 37DL PLUS can currently be operated in English, Spanish, German, and
French.
To change the language on the gage, follow these, steps:

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Language option.
Figure 37 Selecting Language Parameter
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the language setting you need.

8.1.4 Radix
The gage can display and store the thickness data using either a period or a comma as the
Radix.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` UR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
To set the Radix , follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0].

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Radix.
Figure 38 Selecting Radix Parameter
4. Press [ ] and [ ] to change the setting to Period or Comma.

8.1.5 Units
You can change between inches and millimeters unit settings.
To change the units, follow these, steps:

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Units option.
Figure 39 Selecting Units Parameter
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select between the English (inches) or Metric (millimeters)

option.
US
8.1.6 Resolution
The resolution lets you select the thickness read-out resolution.
To set the resolution, follow these, steps:

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Resolution option.
Figure 40 Selecting Resolution Parameter
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select between the Standard or Low option.

Standard: Thickness resolution of 0.001" (0.01mm).
Low: Thickness resolution of 0.01" (0.1mm).
8.1.7 Hold/Blank
Using the Hold/Blank mode, you can set the gage to either continue to show the last
measured thickness and waveform or to not hold the last measured thickness and
waveform while LOS (Loss of Signal) occurs.
To set the Hold/Blank mode, follow these steps:

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Hold/Blank option.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` UT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 41 Selecting Hold/Blank Parameter
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select between the Hold or Blank option.

Hold: Continues to show the last measured thickness and waveform while an LOS
occurs.
Blank: Does not hold the last measured thickness and waveform while an LOS
occurs.
8.1.8 Rectification
The Rectification mode is the way in which the ultrasonic echoes are represented on the
waveform display. The Rectification mode does not affect the thickness measurement in
any way.
The default Rectification mode is called Full Wave Waveform. Both positive and
negative lobes are displayed on the positive side of the waveform, which gives the best
overall representation of position and magnitude for most gaging applications. The
display indicates the rectification type by an indicator “Full” located at the bottom right of
the waveform.
Other Rectification modes that are available are as follows:
• Half Wave Negative: Shows negative echo lobes as positive and does not show the
positive lobes at all. An indicator, NEG, located at the bottom right of the waveform,
indicates half wave negative.
• Half Wave Positive: Shows positive lobes but not negative lobes. An indicator, POS,
located at the bottom right of the waveform, indicates half wave positive.
• Full Wave: Shows the negative portion of the echo folded around the baseline so that
both positive and negative lobes are displayed.
• RF: Shows negative and positive lobes or either side of the waveform.
To Change Rectification Modes, follow these steps:

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Rectification option.
Figure 42 Selecting Rectification Parameter
UU
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the RF, Full, Neg, or Pos option.

8.1.9 Waveform
The Model 37DL PLUS can display the waveform trace as Filled or Unfilled.
Note: A filled waveform trace is only possible when the waveform rectification is
set to full, halfwave negative or halfwave positive.
Unfilled Waveform Filled Waveform
Figure 43 Displaying a Waveform Trace
To set the waveform trace parameter, follow these steps:

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Waveform.
Figure 44 Selecting Waveform Parameter
4. Press [ ] and [ ] to change the setting to Fill or Unfill.

Fill: Waveform trace is viewed as a dark shaded area.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` UV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Unfill: Waveform trace is viewed as an outline.

5. Press [MEAS/RESET] to return to Measurement mode.
8.1.10 Backlight Mode

The display Backlight feature internally illuminates the liquid crystal display. The gage
has excellent visibility in normal to high ambient light conditions, and by using the
Backlight mode you can view the display in low to zero ambient light conditions as well.
To set the Backlight mode parameter, follow these steps:

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Backlight option.
Figure 45 Selecting Backlight Mode Parameter
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select between the Normal or Auto option.

Normal: The Backlight remains on until it is manually turned off.
Auto: The Backlight turns on when the Model 37DL PLUS is actively making
measurements, and turn off 5 seconds after an (LOS) Loss of Signal occurs.
To operate the backlight while using the gage, simply press the key with the lightbulb.
Press the lightbulb key again to turn off the backlight.
Note: Use the Backlight only when necessary because it drains the battery about
three times faster when activated. Both the battery operating time and the
long term brightness of the Backlight are substantially decreased when the
Backlight is used continuously.
8.1.11 Supervisor Lock

The Supervisor Lock feature allows the gage to be locked at a higher level than the
Calibration Lock. (See Managing the Calibration Lock on page 81). When the Supervisor
lock is active, no calibration values can be altered, meaning no parameters can affect the
value of the measurement. The locked values are as follows:
VM
• Velocity
• Test Block Zero
• Differential Reference Value
• Alarm Set
• Transducer Adjustment Parameters
To enable the Supervisor Lock, follow these steps:

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Supv Lock option.
Figure 46 Selecting Supervisor Lock Parameter
4. Press [ ] and [ ] to select On (active) or Off (inactive).

8.1.12 Save Key

Either the displayed thickness value or both the thickness and waveform can be stored in
the datalogger pressing [SAVE]. All of the appropriate calibration and setup parameters
are also stored simultaneously. See Saving Data on page 169 for more information.
To program the [SAVE] key to store either thickness data or thickness plus waveform
data, follow these steps:

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Save Key option.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` VN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 47 Selecting Save Key Parameter
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select between the THK or THK + WF option.

THK: Saves the displayed thickness value in the datalogger.
THK + WF: Saves the displayed thickness value and waveform in the datalogger.
8.1.13 ID Overwrite Protection

ID Overwrite Protection is a function that prompts you with a warning message every time
you attempt to overwrite an existing measurement in the datalogger. You can activate this
function at any time. Once activated, a message prompt displays when an attempt is made
to save data over an existing thickness reading/waveform.
To activate ID Overwrite Protection, follow these steps:

3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the ID Overwrite option.
Figure 48 Selecting ID Overwrite Parameter
4. Press [ ] and [ ] to select between the On (active) or Off (inactive) option.

When ID Overwrite Protection is On, the following screen opens when you attempt to
save data over an existing measurement.
VO
Figure 49 Saving Measurements with Overwrite Protection Activated
5. Press [ ] and [ ] to select Save or Cancel. Press [ENTER].

Save: Replaces the previous reading in the datalogger with the new reading.
Cancel: Stores the previous reading in the datalogger.
Note: The thickness reading and waveform is held on the display while you make
this selection.
8.2 Operating the B-Scan/DB Grid

See Operating the B-Scan on page 113 for detailed information.
8.3 Using Avg/Min Measure

See Reading Avg/Min Measurements on page 122 for detailed information.
8.4 Operating Temperature Compensation

See Managing Temperature Compensation on page 124 for detailed information.
8.5 Managing the Communications Mode

The Communication menu allows the gage and a computer to transfer data. In order for
this communication process to be successful, the parameters in the gage must match those
in the computer.
To change the communication parameters, follow these steps:
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` VP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
1. Verify the computer’s parameters for the baud rate, stop bits, and parity.
2. Press [2nd F], [0] (SETUP). The following menu opens:
Figure 50 Selecting the Communications Mode
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Communication option. Press [ENTER]. The

following menu opens:
Figure 51 Changing the Communication Parameters
The current communication parameters appear. The settings available for each
parameter is as follows:
Baud Rate: (19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, or 1200)
Number of Stop Bits: (1 or 2)
Parity Bit: (None, Odd, or Even)
Comm Protocol: (Multiple or Single)
Output Format: (F1 to F10)
Dbase Tracking: (Off or On)
B-Scan Output: (Off or On)
36DLP Output: (Off or On)
Fisher Enable: (Off or On)
(See Communication Parameters on page 205 for output parameter definitions.)
VQ
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select any of the parameters until the desired parameter is

highlighted.
5. Press [ ] or [ ] to change the parameter setting.
6. Exit this mode by highlighting the Previous Screen option and pressing [ENTER].
Tip: You can also exit this mode by pressing [MEAS/RESET].
8.5.1 Database Tracking

The Database Tracking gage parameters (calibration settings, transducer type, etc.)
automatically track the values stored at each ID number in the database.
Database Tracking intends to solve a problem that arises when historical data is
downloaded into the gage to guide a current measurement survey. You can use the
displayed ID numbers to guide you through the same series of measurements that were
collected in the original reference survey. You can also compare the current
measurements, as they are made, with the previous thickness values displayed under the
ID number.
The problem occurs when the original measurements were taken at different gage settings
such as gain, min mode, transducer type, velocity, etc. To make meaningful comparisons
of new data with old data, the setups need to be identical. Database Tracking forces the
gage to automatically adjust its setup to match the setup previously stored at each ID
number.
Another use of this feature is to pre-load a sequence of setups along with a sequence of ID
numbers before the field measurements are taken. The data collection path and setups can
be created in a computer and then downloaded into the Model 37DL PLUS.
When Database Tracking is selected, the following measurement related parameters are
automatically adjusted to match those stored at the current ID number.
• Alarm Mode (On/Off)
• Alarm Set points
• Differential Mode (On/Off)
• Min/Max Mode (Min/Max/Off)
• Extended Blank Value
• Resolution
• Units
• Gain
• Velocity
• Transducer Type (user prompt only)
When Database Tracking is selected and a waveform is stored at the current ID number,
the following additional waveform related parameters are automatically adjusted to match
those stored with that waveform.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` VR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
• Range
• Zoom (On/Off)
• Extended Blank Position
• Rectification Mode (Full Wave, Half Wave Negative, Half Wave Positive, RF)
If the database does not have any data stored at the current ID number, then the setups
remain unchanged.
Tip: Even if Database Tracking is activated, you can override the settings for the
current ID number by manually changing any setup parameter.
To select Database Tracking, follow these steps:

2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Communication option and press [ENTER].
Figure 52 Selecting the DBASE Tracking Parameters
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the DBASE Tracking option.

4. Press [ ]or [ ] to select the On or Off option.
On: Activates the Database Tracking option
Off: Deactivates the Database Tracking option.
5. Press [MEAS] when finished to return to measure mode.
8.6 Managing Diagnostics

The gage contains several Diagnostic Self Tests to help aid in localizing a suspected
hardware problem or to verify correct hardware operation. These tests can be performed
from the keypad. To go to the Diagnostics menu, press [2nd F], [0] (SETUP). Press [ ]
to highlight Diagnostics, and press [ENTER]. A menu opens with the following options.
• Keypad
VS
• Video
• Hardware Status
• Error Status
8.6.1 Keypad
To operate the Keypad Test, follow these steps:
1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Keypad.

2. Press [ENTER]. The display represents a replica of the keypad.
3. Test any key by pressing it on the keypad. If that specific key is working correctly, the
gage beeps and that key is highlighted on the display.
Tip: [ON/OFF] powers off the gage, and [ENTER] exits the Keypad Test
mode.
8.6.2 Video
To operate the Video Display Test, follow these steps:
1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Video.

2. Press [ENTER]. This test displays a darkened rectangle, which decreases in size. If at
any time a break appears in the pattern, then there is a problem with the waveform
display. Otherwise, it is operating correctly.
8.6.3 Hardware Status
Note: The Hardware Status screen is typically used by GE Panametrics repair

technicians.
To assess the Hardware status, follow these steps:
1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Hardware Status.

2. Press [ENTER]. The gage displays many hardware calibration parameters and status.
If the gage is functioning correctly, all parameters should be marked with a check
mark.
8.6.4 Error Status

The Error Status is a log of any error condition that may have occurred during gage
operation. Pressing [MEAS/RESET] clears the error log and returns to the
Measurement mode.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` VT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
8.7 Operating Gage Resets

The Model 37DL PLUS has four different resets designed to quickly restore the gage to
the default setup parameters.
• Measurement Reset
• Communication Reset
• DBase Reset
• Master Reset
Resets are useful whether you are new or experienced at operating the gage. These resets
provide an efficient short-cut to a known configuration.
8.7.1 Measurement Reset

The Measurement Reset changes the measurement parameters to the factory default
values. The default measurement parameters are listed below.
Measurement Default Parameter
Measurement mode with Fast, Min, Max, and Alarms turned off
Differential
Material Velocity 0.22460 in/sec or 05.7048mm/sec the approximate
velocity of the included test blocks
Differential Reference Value 0.0 in or mm
Low Alarm Reference Value 0.0 in or mm
High Alarm Reference Value 25.0 in or 635.0mm
Cal keys Unlocked
Display Update Rate 4 per second
Zoom Off
Range Minimum range
Blank thickness display when LOS
Standard resolution, i.e. 0.001 in or 0.01mm
Table 7 Measurement Reset Default Settings
To perform the Measurement Reset, follow these steps:

2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Resets option. Press [ENTER].
VU
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Measurement Reset. Press [ENTER]. The gage

prompts you with a warning message.
Figure 53 Warning Prompt for Measurement Reset
4. Press [ ]or [ ] to highlight Reset and press [ENTER] to complete the

measurement reset.
If you want to cancel the operation without resetting the measurement data, press
[ ]or [ ] to highlight Cancel and press [ENTER].
8.7.2 Communications Reset

Caution: The Communications Reset permanently deletes all communication parameters
and restores all values to the default settings.
The Communication Reset resets the Communication parameters to the factory default
values. The default communication parameters are listed below.
Baud rate: 19200
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Comm Protocol: Multiple
Output Format: F1
Dbase Tracking: Off
B-Scan Output: Off
36DLP Output: Off
Fisher Enable: Off
To perform the Communication Reset, follow these steps:

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Communication Reset. Press [ENTER]. The gage
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` VV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 54 Warning Prompt for Communication Reset

communication reset.
If you want to cancel the operation without resetting the communication data, press
8.7.3 DBase Reset

The Dbase Reset deletes all stored data in the datalogger.
Caution: The Dbase Reset permanently deletes all stored thickness reading/waveforms
that are stored in the Model 37DL PLUS. However, this reset does not delete any stored
transducer setups.
To perform a DBase Reset, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SETUP). The Setup mode menu opens.
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Resets option. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the DBASE Reset option. Press [ENTER]. The gage
Figure 55 Warning Prompt for Dbase Reset
4. Press [ ]or [ ] to highlight Reset and press [ENTER] to complete the database
reset.
NMM
If you want to cancel the operation without resetting the database, press [ ]or [ ] to
highlight Cancel and press [ENTER].
8.7.4 Master Reset

The Master Reset performs all of the gage’s resets. The measurement parameters and
communication parameters are reset to their default values and the Dbase is also be reset.
Caution: The Master Reset permanently deletes all stored thickness reading/waveforms
that are stored in the Model 37DL PLUS.
To perform the Master Reset, follow these steps:

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Master Reset. Press [ENTER]. The gage prompts you
with a warning message.
Figure 56 Warning Prompt for Master Reset
4. Press [ ]or [ ] to highlight Reset and press [ENTER] to complete the master reset.
If you want to cancel the operation without resetting the master data, press [ ]or
[ ] to highlight Cancel and press [ENTER].
8.8 Using the Clock

The Model 37DL PLUS has a built in clock for time and date. You can set the clock to
specific time zones in either a 12 or 24 hour mode. You can also set the date in Standard
U.S. format (Month/Day) or International format (Day/Month). The following list
includes the parameters that are available:
• Mode (12 hour/24 hour)
• Hour
• Minutes
• AM/PM
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NMN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
• Time Display
• Mode (US/International)
• Month
• Day
• Year
• Date Display
To set the clock, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0].

2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Clock option, and press [ENTER].
Figure 57 Selecting Clock Parameters
3. Press [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ENTER] to set the parameters to the desired settings.

4. Highlight OK and press [ENTER] to exit or highlight Cancel and press [ENTER] to
terminate the new settings.
Note: If you select the On option for either the Time Display or the Date Display,
the time and date, respectively, are displayed on the Measurement screen.
8.9 Licensed Option

See Chapter Six, Setting Up and Calibrating the 37DL PLUS for the Measurement of
Boiler Tubes and Internal Oxide Scale Measurement: An Optional Feature.
8.10 Oxide Measure

See Chapter Six, Setting Up and Calibrating the 37DL PLUS for the Measurement of
Boiler Tubes and Internal Oxide Scale Measurement: An Optional Feature.
NMO
8.11 Adjusting Display Contrast

The best contrast is achieved when viewing the display screen in bright light. However, it
is also readable in subdued light or even complete darkness by using the built-in backlight.
You can control the contrast of the display by adjusting the setting.
To adjust the waveform display contrast, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [LIGHTBULB].

2. Press [ ] to darken the display, or [ ] to lighten the display.
To stop adjusting the contrast, press [ENTER] or [MEAS/RESET]. This action disables
the [ ] and [ ] keys from adjusting the contrast.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NMP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
NMQ
rëáåÖ=^Çî~åÅÉÇ=d~ÖáåÖ=cÉ~íìêÉë
9 Using Advanced Gaging Features

The Model 37DL PLUS has many advanced thickness measurement features that assist
in making the gage a stronger, more versatile instrument. This chapter describes how to
use these advanced features.

• Setting the Manual Gain Adjust
• Using Automatic Gain Optimization
• Adjusting the Extended Blank
• Using the Echo-to-Echo Mode
• Operating the B-Scan
• Using the Grid View
• Operating the Thru-Coat Function
• Reading Avg/Min Measurements
• Managing Temperature Compensation
• Using Single Element Oxide Measurements
• Using an Emat Transducer
9.1 Setting the Manual Gain Adjust with a D79X Series

and E110, EMAT Transducers
Note: GE Panametrics recommends that only experienced operators, who can

analyse and understand the waveform display, use the Manual Gain feature.
In most corrosion measurement applications the Model 37DL PLUS gage automatically
sets the optimum gain by default for the most accurate measurements. Therefore, the gain
does not require adjustment except in special circumstances. Increasing the gain is
generally recommended for high temperature measurements.
The Manual Gain Adjust feature allows the default measurement gain to be manually
increased or decreased in steps of 1 dB. This feature also modifies the way in which echoes
are shown on the waveform display. Normally, the displayed echo height is automatically
adjusted so that the peak of the measured echo is on the screen. This is so the position of the
measured echo is readily observable on the screen independent of its strength and the
receiver gain. However, when manually adjusting the receiver gain, the displayed echo
height is changed to be proportional to the actual echo amplitude at the receiver output
allowing gain changes to be readily observable.
Measured echoes must be at least 20% of screen height in amplitude (first gradicule line
above baseline) in order to be processed for thickness calculation. This allows you to
judge whether the current gain is too high (noise above the baseline is causing the reading
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NMR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
to be too low), or the gain is too low (the correct backwall echo is below the threshold
causing the reading to “double” or read too high).
When the gain is set to anything other than default gain, the value in dB (decibels) is
displayed near the lower right side of the waveform.
Figure 58 Viewing Changes in the Default Gain
To view, restore, or change the receiver gain from the Measurement mode, follow these
steps:
1. Press [GAIN].
The waveform display changes to the Amplitude Proportional to Gain mode, which
is indicated by a gain value on the waveform display. The gain remains equal to the
default value.
2. Press [GAIN] again to restore the last previously set gain or press [ ] or [ ] to adjust
the gain.
The effect of your action becomes immediately visible in the height of the echoes and
the gain value on the waveform display. After changing the gain, resume making
measurements with the displayed echoes proportional to gain.
3. Press [GAIN] again to return to the automatically adjusted Echo Height mode
(default gain). Default gain is indicated by a blank Gain field (“ dB”).
9.2 Using Automatic Gain Optimization

The Automatic Gain Optimization feature allows the default measurement gain to be
increased or decreased automatically by an amount related to the measured peak noise
from the transducer being used and the material being measured. Normally, the Model
37DL PLUS adjusts its receiver gain depending on both the transducer type and the
received echo characteristics in order to make the most accurate thickness measurements,
which works well in most material gaging applications. However, in special cases it is
advantageous to have the gage refine its operating gain.
NMS
The Automatic Gain Optimization feature adjusts the gain by using actual material noise
level measurements rather than fixed gain boosts or fixed attenuators. While the
transducer is coupled to a thick sample of the material of interest, the gage measures the
peak noise level up to the specified back wall thickness. Then the gage adjusts the gain
value up or down to produce the maximum back wall echo sensitivity without hanging up
on noise.
Performing the gain optimization procedure on different materials may yield different
results. In the case of grainy materials such as cast iron or high surface noise materials
such as aluminium, this procedure may result in a decrease in gain. In the case of hot
materials with rough surfaces or other highly attenuating but low noise materials, this
procedure may produce an increase in the gain.
To perform Automatic Gain Optimization, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [GAIN] (OPT) while in the Measurement mode.

The gage responds by displaying 0.000, 0.00 or 0.0, depending on units and
resolution.
2. Enter the estimated thickness of the material sample.
It is better to guess low, if you are uncertain. The sample should match the material to
be measured as closely as possible in surface condition and temperature.
3. Couple the selected transducer to the test material and press [MEAS/RESET].
Gain optimization is performed and the gage returns to the Measurement mode. The
optimized gain value, “XX dB”, is shown near the lower right corner of the waveform.
9.2.1 Return to Default Gain

When operating with optimized gain values indicated by a display of “XX dB”, you can
restore the default gain by pressing [GAIN]. Default gain is always indicated by a blank
field before the dB (“ dB”). After restoring the default gain, the optimized value is stored
internally for later recall.
Tip: You can also restore the default gain by turning the gage off and on and
pressing [ZERO].
9.2.2 Restore the Previous Automatically Optimized Gain

When operating with the default gain value indicated by a display of “ dB”, you can recall
the previous optimized gain setting directly, without returning to the default gain. The
only requirement is that the transducer cannot have been changed since the original
Automatic Gain Optimization. If an attempt is made to restore an optimized gain that does
not exist, then default gain is used.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NMT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
9.3 Adjusting the Extended Blank with D79X Series

Transducers
Caution: GE Panametrics recommends that only experienced operators who thoroughly

understand the acoustic properties of the material being measured use this feature.
Incorrect use of the extended blank can cause the gage to misread areas of thin material.
Normally, the gage searches for echoes down to nearly zero thickness. However, some
special circumstances such as a high degree of near surface corrosion, aluminium
material, and enclosed flaws or laminations can generate echoes that the gage may falsely
read as low thickness. If these echoes are larger than the sought after backwall echo, the
gain adjustment features described above cannot prevent detection. However, the Model
37DL PLUS Extended Blank feature allows you to prevent any such erroneous
measurements from occurring within an “extended blank” period, which you can set using
the waveform display.
To activate the Extended Blank, do the following:
Press [2nd F], [1] (EXT’D BLK).
The extended blank becomes active, but initially its value is zero. The gage remains in
the Measurement mode. The blank length is indicated by a horizontal bar just below
the bottom graticule line and extending from the left edge of the waveform display to
the upper end of the extended blank period.
Figure 59 Viewing the Blank Length
To deactivate the Extended Blank, press [2nd F], [1] (EXT’D BLK) again.
Tip: You can adjust the Extended Blank from a live Measurement mode.
NMU
9.3.1 Adjust the Depth of the Extended Blank

When the Extended Blank is enabled, press [ ] or [ ] to change the length of the
extended blank period. If the measurement point changes when the extended blank is
moved, then the echoes may change in height; this is because in the normal waveform
display mode, the gage attempts to adjust the height. The gage also attempts to make the
most accurate measurement by identifying the beginning of an echo. If the blank is
positioned within an echo rather than to the left of it, then the gage will not be able to make
an accurate detection.
9.4 Using the Echo-to-Echo Mode

The Echo-to-Echo measurement feature allows the Model 37DL PLUS to measure
remaining wall thickness of painted metal while ignoring the coating thickness. Echo-to-
Echo mode refers to measuring from one backwall echo to the next backwall echo. The
time interval between these echoes does not include the time through any paint, resin, or
organic coating that is present. The waveform display indicates the exact pair of echoes
used to determine the thickness. The internal datalogger saves and recognizes all
necessary Echo-to-Echo information to upload and download thickness, waveform, and
setup data.
To change Measurement mode between the normal total wall thickness mode and the
Echo-to-Echo mode, do the following:
Press [2nd F] [ZOOM].
You can use all measurement, display, and datalogger functions with the Echo-to-Echo
mode. Echo-to-Echo measurements use either the same dual transducers that are used for
normal measurements, or a single element delay line transducer (GE Panametrics P/N:
M201 with cable and adapter).
When dual transducers are used in the Echo-to-Echo mode, you do not need to set any
gates or thresholds, however you can set special blanking gates if the application requires
it. Additionally, when using a single element transducer, you can set the Extended Blank
to skip the paint/metal interface echo.
Tip: Uncoated wall thickness measurements can also be made in the Echo-to-
Echo mode, so you do not have to switch between modes when measuring
both coated and uncoated areas.
9.4.1 Automatic Mode

There are two modes available in the Echo-to-Echo mode: Automatic mode and
Manual mode. The Automatic mode is easier to use and is recommended for most
applications. (See Manual Mode on page 110.)
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NMV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
To select the Automatic mode, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F] [ZOOM].
Figure 60 Selecting the Automatic Mode
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Auto E to E option. Press [MEAS/RESET].

Automatic mode is indicated on the waveform display by a distinctive measurement
marker. The standard triangular marker is replaced by a thin horizontal bar within two
short vertical lines. The ends of this bar are aligned with the peaks of the two backwall
echoes that are being measured. In the Automatic mode, the echo height is automatically
adjusted to a preset level. The Automatic mode is also indicated by replacing the “DE-
STD” indicator with “DE-AEtoE:”.
9.4.2 Manual Mode

There are two modes available in the Echo-to-Echo mode: Automatic mode and
Manual mode. The Manual mode lets you adjust the gain and blanking functions, which
provides greater flexibility in difficult measurement situations where the Automatic
mode may be less effective. (See Automatic Mode on page 109.)
To select the Manual mode, follow these steps:
Figure 61 Selecting the Manual Mode
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to select the Manual E to E option. Press [MEAS/RESET].

The Manual mode is indicated on the waveform display by a distinctive measurement
marker. The triangular marker is replaced by a thin horizontal bar between two short
vertical lines. The two vertical lines are aligned with the peaks of the two backwall echoes
which are being measured. A thick horizontal bar above the thin bar indicates the width of
the adjustable echo blank. The Manual mode is also indicated by replacing the “DE-
STD” indicator with “DE-MEtoE”.
In the Manual mode, the gage selects the first echo following the Extended Blank as the
first backwall echo. The gage then selects the next echo that is at least 20% of screen
height as the second echo. In situations where material conditions produce noisy signals,
you may need to adjust the echo blanks to detect the second backwall. (See Blanking
NNM
Adjustments in Manual Echo-to-Echo on page 111.) You can press [ ] and [ ] to adjust
the gain in order to detect low amplitude signals or ignore unwanted signals.
Note: You do not have to press [GAIN] to activate the [ ] and [ ] keys because
Gain Adjust is automatically enabled when you select Manual EtoE mode.
9.4.3 Blanking Adjustments in Manual Echo-to-Echo

The Model 37DL PLUS offers two blanking functions to help detect valid echoes in
situations where material conditions generate unwanted signals. The Extended Blank
creates a blanked zone beginning at the left edge of the display in which no signals are
detected. In situations where the second or third pair of backwall echoes are stronger or
cleaner than the first pair, you can use the Extended Blank to control which pair of echoes
to use for measurement. The echo blanking runs for a selected interval following the first
detected echo, and it is used to blank any unwanted peaks that may occur between the first
and second backwall echoes such as the trailing edge of a large first echo or shear wave
reflections on thick test pieces.
Both blanks are active in the Manual mode. Only the extended blank is active in the
Standard mode. Adjust these blanks by pressing [2nd F], [1] (EXT’ BLK). Pressing
[2nd F], [1] (EXT’ BLK) again toggles between accessing extended blanking and echo
blanking adjustments. Pressing [2nd F], [1] (EXT’ BLK) a third time disables the blanks.
A solid bar beneath the waveform indicates the current length of each blank; press [ ] or
[ ] to adjust the length.
Poor Manual Measurement Good Manual Measurement
Figure 62 Comparing Manual Measurements
9.4.4 Return to Normal Measurement Mode

To exit either the Automatic or Manual mode and return to the Normal Measurement
mode, follow these steps:
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NNN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 63 Selecting the Normal Measurement Mode
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Standard Meas option.

3. Press [MEAS/RESET].
9.4.5 Transducer Usage in Echo-to-Echo Mode

Although the Echo-to-Echo mode works with all of the Model 37DL PLUS transducers,
GE Panametrics recommends using particular transducers for steel in the approximate
thickness ranges. Refer to Table 8 on page 112.
Transducer Type Thickness Range*
D798 0.060 to 0.300" (1.5 to 7.50mm)

D790/791 0.100 to 2.00" (2.0 to 50mm)
D797 0.500 to 5.00" (12.5 to 125mm)
M201 0.050 to 0.500" (1.25 to 12.5mm)
* Thickness ranges are dependent on material, surface condition, and temperature
Table 8 Recommended Transducers for Steel Using Echo-to-Echo Mode

In some cases, an error can occur if you are using a D790 transducer above 0.7" (18mm).
Typically, this error is due to a mode-converted shear-wave echo that may appear before
the second backwall echo. If this unwanted echo is larger than the second backwall echo,
the gage measures to it, which produces a thinner reading.
You can usually distinguish the unwanted shear-wave echo from the correct backwall
echo by examining the waveform display. The second backwall echo appears at the same
distance beyond the first backwall echo as the first backwall echo appears beyond the zero
thickness point. If there is an echo between the first two multiples of the backwall echo it
is probably a mode-converted shear-wave echo. Use the Echo-to-Echo Manual mode
techniques and Manual blank to eliminate this error. (See Manual Mode on page 110.)
Also, using the D797 transducer beyond 0.7" (18mm) helps eliminate the possibility of
this error.
In some cases the second or third backwall echo is smaller in amplitude than subsequent
echoes causing the gage to give a double or triple reading. If you are using a D790, this
effect may occur around 0.2" (5mm) on flat smooth steel samples. If this occurs, it is
clearly visible on the waveform display and you can work around it by using the Echo-to-
Echo Manual mode or moving the Extended Blank beyond the previously detected first
peak echo.
NNO
When you use a M201 single element transducer and the paint/metal interface is large
enough to be detected, then you must set the Extended Blank to extend beyond that echo.
The gage should measure between the first two pairs of backwall echoes.
When the Model 37DL PLUS cannot make an Echo-to-Echo reading, the LOS flag on the
thickness display is enabled. In this case, the waveform display shows that either no
echoes are large enough to be detected (no detection marker) or that only one echo is
detectable (detection marker begins at detected echo but extends indefinitely to the right).
Press [GAIN], [ ] and [ ] to increase the gain in order to make a good Echo-to-Echo
reading. However, if this does not help make a good Echo-to-Echo reading, you can still
obtain an approximate measurement by returning to the Normal Measurement mode. (If
you are using M201, switch to a dual element transducer.)
9.4.6 Echo-to-Echo Mode Datalogger Flags

The following flags are used in the Echo-to-Echo mode in the first flag field of the
uploaded Thickness Table and the top left flag box on the waveform display:
• E: Automatic Echo-to-Echo measurement
• e: Manual Echo-to-Echo measurement
• M: Normal measurement
• l: Automatic LOS in Echo-to-Echo mode
• n: LOS in Manual Echo-to-Echo mode
• L: LOS in Normal Measurement mode
9.5 Operating the B-Scan

B-Scan converts thickness readings to cross-sectional image profiles. You can save these
images on the gage in order to review or download to a computer or printer at a later time.
The follow are definitions of the available B-Scan options and parameters. Use this
information to help you get the best results to meet your needs. (The steps to select any of
these parameters begin on page 115.)
Figure 64 Changing B-Scan Parameters
• B-Scan Size Mode: Determines the size of the B-Scan. You can select the Half option
for a half-screen B-Scan, or the Full option for a full-screen B-Scan. The Half option
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NNP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
displays a half-height A-Scan waveform that allows space for the half-height B-Scan
(See Display Half B-Scan on page 116). The Full option does not display an A-Scan,
which allows enough space to display the B-Scan on the entire screen (See Display
Full B-Scan on page 116).
• B-Scan Direction: Determines the direction that the data is updated or drawn on the
Model 37DL PLUS screen. Choose the B-Scan direction based on the direction of
transducer movement.
– Left to right: Causes the data to start at the right of the screen and scroll to the left,
but produces a B-Scan that is properly orientated based on transducer movement.
– Right to left: Causes the data to start at the left of the screen and scroll to the right.
• B-Scan LOS Mode: Determines how the B-Scan operates when a Loss of Signal
(LOS) occurs.
– Stop: Causes the B-Scan to stop scrolling when a LOS occurs. If the B-scan is set
to stop on LOS, and the gage regains measurements, a blank vertical line is
inserted into the B-Scan. This is a marker showing that a LOS has occurred at the
marked position.
– Continue: Allows the B-Scan to continue scrolling when a LOS occurs.
• B-Scan Freeze Mode: Determines which waveform and thickness reading are
displayed when you press [FREEZE] during a scan.
– Show Minimum: Displays the waveform and thickness reading for the minimum
reading collected during the scan.
– Show Maximum: Displays the waveform and thickness reading for the maximum
reading collected during the scan.
– Show Current: Displays the last thickness reading made before pressing
[FREEZE].
Loss of Signal (LOS)

Live M in or M ax
M arker shown while Scan Direction
Figure 65 Analyzing a B-Scan
• B-Scan Freeze Review: Review scanned thickness values by pressing [FREEZE].

When this feature is enabled and you press [FREEZE], a vertical line (Review
Marker) appears to indicate the location of the displayed thickness. This is either the
minimum, maximum, or current thickness depending which Freeze option selected.
The unit displays both the thickness and the waveform of the held minimum or
maximum. Press [ ] and [ ] to move the Review Marker to the left or the right of
the scan. During review, the gage always displays the thickness at the Review Marker
location.
NNQ
Tip: If the minimum or maximum value moved off the B-Scan screen, press
[FREEZE] to center the B-Scan and the review marker on the minimum or
maximum thickness.
Min Waveform
Review Marker
Minimum
Thickness
Location
Figure 66 Defining the Freeze Review Display
• B-Scan Max THK Mode: Determines the vertical scale of the B-Scan.
– A-Scan Range: The top and bottom of the vertical scale corresponds to the start
and end of the range of the A-Scan display.
– Specified THK: Prompts you to input a value for the B-Scan maximum thickness
by pressing [0]-[9]. The top of the vertical scale represents the zero value and the
bottom of the scale is the value that was input as the maximum thickness.
Note: GE Panametrics does not recommend using the A-Scan Zoom feature when
the B-Scan Max Thickness is set to A-Scan Range. Zoom constantly
adjusts the start and the end-points of the A-Scan Range resulting in a B-
Scan image where the Scale changes as the thickness changes. Use the A-
Scan Zoom feature if the B-Scan Max thickness is set to a specified value.
• B-Scan Max Thickness: If you select Specified THK as the B-Scan Max THK
mode (see above), then this option lets you enter the maximum B-Scan thickness. The
allowable range is 0.000" to 25.000" (0.00mm to 635.00mm).
To select the B-Scan option, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0](SETUP).

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the B-SCAN/DB GRID option. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Option option. Press [ ] and [ ] to select None,
B-Scan, or DB Grid.
None: Disables both B-Scan and DB-Grid leaving the gage is in Standard mode.
B-Scan: Enables B-Scan function.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NNR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
DB Grid: Enables DB-Grid function.

4. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight individual B-Scan parameters. Press [ ] and [ ] to
change the highlighted setting. (See parameter definitions beginning on page 113.)
5. Complete desired selections and press [MEAS/RESET] to return to Measurement
mode with the B-Scan active.
The B-Scan begins drawing the cross-section of the material as soon as the first non-
LOS reading is collected.
6. Press [FREEZE] to stop the collection of B-Scan data.
If you selected Stop as the B-Scan LOS option, uncouple the transducer from the test
material and the B-Scan will stop automatically.
7. Press [MEAS/RESET] at any time to reset the B-Scan and begin a new B-Scan.
9.5.1 Display Half B-Scan

The half size B-Scan is displayed in Measurement mode along with a half size waveform.
Oldest to newest scanned thicknesses are arranged from left to right when you select the
Left to Right B-Scan direction. When you select the Right to Left B-Scan direction the
orientation is reversed.
When you select the Show Minimum or Show Maximum Freeze mode the marker at the
bottom points to the first scanned min or max thickness. In these modes, the Min or Max
mode is automatically enabled. When you select the Show Current Freeze mode, the
marker point to the most recently scanned thickness.
9.5.2 Display Full B-Scan

The full size B-Scan is displayed in Measurement mode instead of the waveform grid. As
with the half size B-Scan grid, oldest to newest scanned thicknesses are arranged from left
to right when you select the Left to Right B-Scan direction. When you select the Right to
Left B-Scan direction the orientation is reversed.
When you select the Show Minimum or Show Maximum Freeze mode the marker at the
bottom identifies the first scanned min or max thickness. In these modes, the Min or Max
mode is automatically enabled. When you select the Show Current Freeze mode, the
marker identifies the most recently scanned thickness.
9.5.3 Enable the B-Scan Alarm Mode

You can specify low and high alarm reference values to use in B-Scan Alarm mode and
turn the visual and audible alarm functions On and Off. B-Scan Alarm mode is the same
as the Standard Alarm mode except that in B-Scan Alarm mode lines are shown in the
B-Scan grid if the reference values fall within the B-Scan range thickness. In addition,
when B-Scan Alarm mode is enabled, the alarms are operational as you review B-Scan
thicknesses in B-Scan Freeze Review mode. (See B-Scan Alarm on page 79 for
information about setting up the alarm feature.)
NNS
9.5.4 Save B-scans, A-Scans, or Thickness Readings

The Model 37DL PLUS can do the following tasks while using the B-scan feature:
• Save a live thickness reading while the B-Scan is running
• Save any reviewed thickness reading on a held B-Scan
• Save the minimum or maximum thickness reading for a held B-Scan
• Save the minimum or maximum thickness reading and waveform along with the held
B-Scan
(Review the steps below to perform any of the tasks listed above.)
To save a live thickness reading while the B-Scan is running, do the following:
Press [SAVE] at any time while the B-scan is running to save the current thickness
reading.
To save any reviewed thickness reading on a held B-Scan do the following:
If Freeze Review is enabled, press [ ] and [ ] to review any thickness on the held
B-Scan. Press [SAVE] at the position of the review marker to save the thickness for
that position into the datalogger.
To save the minimum or maximum thickness reading for a held B-Scan, do the following:
When B-Scan Freeze Opt is set to Show Min or Show Max, the gage displays the
minimum or maximum thickness reading with associated waveform when you press
[FREEZE]. You can save this value by pressing [SAVE] while the minimum or
maximum thickness reading is displayed.
To save the minimum or maximum A-Scan along with the held B-Scan, do the following:
When B-Scan Freeze Opt is set to Show Min or Show Max, the gage displays the
minimum or maximum thickness reading when you press [FREEZE]. You can save
the thickness value along with waveform and B-Scan by pressing [2nd F], [SAVE]
while the minimum or maximum thickness reading is displayed.
Note: When a B-Scan screen is saved to the datalogger, the gage saves the
thickness value at all 200 data points on the display. All thickness values on
a saved B-Scan can be reviewed during ID Review. Recall the saved B-Scan
and use the [ ] and [ ] keys to review each thickness reading.
9.6 Using the Grid View

Using Grid View you can navigate through grids by simultaneously displaying the grid
positions along with the A-Scan and thickness reading. This gives you the ability to move
freely in any direction on a grid rather than follow a pre-set list of IDs. Instead of
automatically incrementing to the next ID location, you can use the arrow keys to move to
a location that is more convenient.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NNT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
The following are definitions of the available Grid View options. Use this information to
help you get the best results to meet your needs. (The steps to select any of these
parameters begin on page 120.)
Figure 67 Changing DB Grid Parameters
• Grid Size Mode: Determines the size of the database grid. You can select the Half
option for a half-screen grid, or the Full option for a full-screen grid. The Half option
displays a half-screen A-Scan waveform and a half-screen database grid (See Display
Half Database Grid on page 120). The Full option does not display an A-Scan
displays the database grid on the entire screen (See Display Full Database Grid on
page 121).
• Reverse Grid Rows: Reverses the rows in the grid from ascending to descending. Note
that the ID number increments in the order assigned when the file was originally set up
(by row, by column, zig-zag, etc.) unless changed using Edit-Rename from the File
option.
Figure 68 Displaying Reverse Grid Rows Off (Ascending)
Figure 69 Displaying Reverse Grid Rows On
• Reverse Grid Cols: Reverses the columns in the grid from ascending to descending.
Note that the ID number increments in the order assigned when the file was originally
NNU
set up (by row, by column, zig-zag, ect.) unless changed using Edit-Rename from the
File option.
Figure 70 Displaying Reverse Grid Columns Off (Ascending)
Figure 71 Displaying Reverse Grid Columns On (Descending)
• Transpose Grid: Allows the gage to interchange the rows and columns in a grid. The
rows are displayed on the x-axis and the columns are displayed on the y-axis. Note that
the ID number increments in the order assigned when the file was originally set up (by
row, by column, zig-zag, etc.) unless changed using Edit-Rename from the File
option.
Figure 72 Displaying Transpose Grid Off
Figure 73 Displaying Transpose Grid On
• Linearize Rows and Columns: Allows the gage to display the grid IDs in linear form.
Figure 74 Displaying Grid IDS in Linear Form
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NNV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
• Data Cell Flag: Displays a single data flag with each data cell in the database grid. If
you select this option, the data flag is displayed in a small box to the right of the
thickness value in the data cell. You can omit the data flag by selecting None, or you
can select one of the following data flags: Min/Max, Alarm, or A-Scan.
– Min/Max flag: “m” indicates a minimum thickness. “M” indicates a maximum
thickness. “-” (dash character) indicates the thickness is not a minimum or a
maximum.
– Alarm flag: “L” indicates any kind of low alarm condition including a standard
low alarm condition or a previous thickness alarm. “H” indicates any high alarm
condition. “-” (dash character) indicates no alarm condition.
– A-Scan flag: “W” indicates that a waveform is stored with the thickness. “-” (dash
character) indicates a waveform is not stored with the thickness.
Figure 75 Viewing the Data Cell Flag Screen
To select the Grid View, follow these steps:

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the B-SCAN/DB GRID option. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Option option. Press [ ] and [ ] to change the
mode to DB GRID.
None: Disables both B-Scan and DB-Grid while the gage is in Standard mode.
B-Scan: Enables B-Scan function.
DB Grid: Enables DB-Grid function.
4. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the other options (Reverse Grid Rows, Reverse Grid
Columns, Transpose Grid, Linearize Rows and Columns). Press [ ] and [ ] to
change the parameters. (See parameter definitions beginning on page 117.)
5. Complete parameter selections and press [MEAS/RESET] to return to
Measurement mode with Grid View enabled.
9.6.1 Display Half Database Grid

The half size DB grid is displayed in Measurement mode along with a half size waveform
grid. Up to 5 grid rows are shown and the number of grid columns shown varies,
depending on the length of column label strings and whether or not a database flag is
displayed with each data cell. The current DB grid cell changes when the current ID
changes, for example when you press [SAVE]. You can press the ID# key to enter the ID
Review and use the arrow key to navigate to a different grid position.
NOM
9.6.2 Display Full Database Grid

The full size DB grid is displayed in Measurement mode instead of the waveform grid.
Up to 11 grid rows are shown. The number of grid columns shown varies depending on the
length of column label strings and whether or not a database flag is displayed with each
data cell. The current DB grid cell changes when the current ID changes, for example
when you press [SAVE]. You can press [ID#] to enter the ID Review and use the arrow
key to navigate to a different grid position.
Note: You can select one of the following data flag conditions to appear in the
attribute field of a grid cell: alarms (H or L), min/max (m or M), or saved A-
Scan ("W"). This setting is used globally in Measurement mode and ID
Review mode.
9.6.3 Save Thickness Readings

To save thickness readings, do the following:
While the thickness value is displayed, press [SAVE] to save the thickness, or press
[2nd F], [SAVE] (WAVEFORM) to save the thickness and waveform. There is an
audible beep that indicates the reading is saved. The displayed thickness value and
setup information is stored at the current ID location signified by the highlighted cell
in the grid. If the thickness display is blank when you press [SAVE], then “--.---” is
saved in place of a value.
The ID number is automatically updated to the next ID number in the sequence. The new
ID number is indicated on the ID line of the display as well as a highlighted cell in the grid.
If the ID number cannot be updated, a long beep sounds and the gage displays a message
pertaining to the reason the ID was unable to update. In this case the ID number on the
display remains unchanged.
Note: The ID number increments in the order assigned when the file was originally
set up (by row, by column, zig-zag, etc.) regardless of how the grid is
displayed on the screen (reversed rows, or reversed columns or transposed
grid) unless changed using Edit-Rename from the File option.
9.6.4 Grid Navigation

To navigate a grid, follow these steps:
1. Press [ID#] while in Measurement mode. The following data is displayed on the
screen:
• Current ID Location
• Current Filename
• Stored Thickness value
• Stored Waveform (if any) with status flags
• Stored Comments or Notes
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NON
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
2. Press [ ], [ ], [ ], or [ ] to highlight the grid location to view.

3. Press [2nd F], [ ] to jump to the last ID location in the file. Press [2nd F], [ ] to jump
to the first ID location in the file.
4. Press [ID#] at any time to edit the displayed ID location.
Note: In order to maintain the format of the grid, inserted or appended IDs are
represented by a shaded cell. To view the edited ID, highlight the shaded cell
and press [ZOOM]. The grid is changed to a linear view and the inserted or
appended ID number is displayed. Press [ZOOM] again to return to the grid
view.
5. Press [MEAS/RESET] to return to Measurement mode with the current ID number

changed to the ID location selected in the ID review mode. You can also press [2nd F],
[MEAS/RESET] to return to Measurement mode with the current ID number
unchanged. The current ID location is the last active ID location in Measurement
mode.
9.7 Operating the Thru-Coat Function

See Performing a Thru-Coat Calibration Using D7906 and D7908 Transducers on page
39.
9.8 Reading Avg/Min Measurements

Use the Avg/Min Measurement feature to store the average or minimum measurements of
several successive thickness readings to the datalogger.
To set the Avg/Min Measurement parameters, follow these steps:
1. Press [2ndF], [0] (setup).

2. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Avg/Min Measure option. Press [ENTER].
Figure 76 Opening the Avg/Min Measure Dialog Box
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Enable option. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Off or

On.
Off: Disables Avg/Min Measurement.
On: Enables Avg/Min Measurement.
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Mode option. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Avg or Min.
NOO
Avg: Calculates the average of the sequential thickness readings.

Min: Calculates the Minimum of the sequential thickness readings.
5. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the # of Readings option. Press [ ] or [ ] to select 2, 3,
or 4.
Each number refers to the number of thickness values in the sequence.
9.8.1 Making Avg/Min Measurements

When you are in the Measurement mode with Avg/Min Measurement active, the
Measurement screen is displayed as shown below.
The "A" in the right most box indicates the The "M" in the right most box indicates the
Average is selected Min is selected
Figure 77 Viewing the Display Screen with Avg/Min Measurement Active
To make thickness readings using the Avg/Min Measurement mode, follow these steps:
1. Couple your transducer to the material and the thickness appears on the display.
2. Press [SAVE] to display the thickness in the left most thickness box. Each time you
press [SAVE] the current thickness reading appears in the next shaded box moving to
the right while the minimum or average of the thickness readings is automatically
calculated and placed in the right most box.
3. Press [SAVE] when the Min or Average box are highlighted to store that value in the
datalogger at the current ID# location and clear all the boxes.
Note: Press [ ] or [ ] to switch from one highlighted box to another in the

display screen. If you want to replace a reading, highlight the box of the
measurement you want to replace and save a new reading. Press [MEAS] to
clear all the boxes without saving to the datalogger.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NOP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
0.299
Figure 78 Replacing a Avg/Min Measurement Reading
9.9 Managing Temperature Compensation

The Temperature Compensation feature allows the gage to compensate for changes in
sound velocity from of a test block at room temperature to the actual material that can be
at an elevated temperature. The sound velocity of most steel changes about 1% for every
100°F (55°C) change in temperature. Using this feature, you can input the temperature of
the calibration standard in either °F or °C units. You can manually enter a fixed elevated
temperature, manually enter a temperature for the current measurement location, or
automatically read the temperature from an optional temperature probe.
The following equation is used to compensate for this change in sound velocity due to
temperature.
Temperature Corrected Thickness = MTI*Vo*(1+(k*(T1-To)))
Where:
MTI = Time measured interval
Vo = Calibrated test block velocity
T1 = Current material temperature
To = Temperature at calibration
k = Temperature coefficient (normally -0.0001°F or -0.00005°C )
Note: A temperature coefficient of 0.00001 assumes a 1%
Change in velocity per 100°F (55°C) change in temperature.
To set the temperature compensation parameters, follow these steps:

2. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Temp Compensation option. Press [ENTER].
NOQ
Figure 79 Opening Temp Compensation Dialog Box
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Enable option. Press [ ] or [ ] to select On or

Off.
On: Enables temperature compensation.
Off: Disables temperature compensation.
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Mode option. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Manual or
Auto.
Manual: Specifies an initial current temperature value. Display or update the current
temperature directly from Measurement mode by entering [2nd], [7] (Temp).
Auto: Automatically acquires the current temperature through an optional probe
connected to the gage’s serial port.
5. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Degree Units option. Press [ ] or [ ] to select
Fahrenheit or Celsius.
6. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Calibration Temp option. Enter a number in the
active field.
The allowable range is 14ºF to 932ºF or -10ºC to 500ºC. You can specify a negative
sign by entering [2nd], [ ] or [ ].
7. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Temp Coef (k) option. Enter a number in the active
field (-0.0001ºF, -0.00005ºC).
8. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Current Temp option. Enter a number in the active
field.
When you select Manual from the Mode option (see steps above) enter an initial
current temperature value in the Current Temp field. The allowable range is 14ºF to
932ºF or -10ºC to 500ºC.
9. Press [MEAS] to return to the Temperature Compensation mode. The thickness
displayed in the thickness field on the display screen is the temperature compensated
thickness based on the Calibration Temp, the Current Temp, and the Temperature
Coefficient.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NOR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
500 ° F
Figure 80 Displaying Temperature Compensation Data
10. When Temperature Compensation mode is set to Manual, you can change the
current temperature by pressing [2ndF], [7] (TEMP) and entering the new
temperature using the numeric keys. If you do not enter a different temperature for
each measurement location, then the gage uses the current temperature until the value
is changed.
11. When Temperature Compensation mode is set to Auto, you can send the current
temperature directly to the gage using the optional temperature probe.
Note: Both the thickness and current temperature values are saved to the internal
datalogger.
NOS
j~å~ÖáåÖ=íÜÉ=a~í~äçÖÖÉê
10 Managing the Datalogger

Two very useful features of the Model 37DL PLUS are the internal datalogger and the
two-way serial communication (RS-232) interface. The operation of the datalogger and
data transmission are discussed in this section. (See Appendix D - Serial Interface on page
241 for more information.)
• Understanding the Datalogger
• Organizing the Datalogger
• Creating Data Files
• Opening a File
• Copying a File
• Deleting a File
• Editing/Renaming a File
• Creating or Editing Comment Tables from a Computer
• Creating or Editing Comment Tables from the Model 37DL PLUS
• Saving Data
• Using the Review ID Mode
• Using the Edit ID Mode
• Erasing Data
• Using the Optional Bar Code Wand to Enter an ID Number
• Generating Reports
Note: An optional Bar Code Wand is available. (See Appendix E - Data Output
Format on page 243.) This bar code wand directs measurement location ID
numbers into the gage by simply scanning bar code labels. The Bar Code
Wand plugs directly into the gage I/O connector.
10.1 Understanding the Datalogger

The Model 37DL PLUS datalogger has a built-in file and data management system. Each
thickness reading and/or waveform is stored and tagged with an alphanumeric
identification number and file name with descriptive fields. A complete description of the
measurement type, gage calibration and setup parameters is stored along with each
reading. The following are just a few datalogger functions:
• Store the waveform display with any thickness measurement
• Recall stored data to the gage displays, printed out, or send to a computer
• Receive previously transmitted thickness and waveform data back from a computer
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NOT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
• View current datalogger settings while simultaneously taking measurements as,

shown below:
Comment Notes
File Name
Previous
ID number
Thickness
Date/Time
Figure 81 Identifying Datalogger Settings
You can store either thickness measurements only or thickness measurements with an
associated waveform. When each measurement is stored, the gage also stores a complete
description of the measurement conditions with the measurement. The additional data
stored with each thickness value includes:
• File Name
• File Header Data
• Identifier
• Units (in or mm)
• LOS (Loss of Signal)
• Differential Mode
• Alarm Mode
• Alarm Status
• Alarm Set Points
• Minimum or Maximum Mode
• Minimum or Maximum Reading
• Velocity
• Resolution
• Transducer Setup Number and Information
• Coating Thickness (when Thru-Coat is active)
• Temperature (when Temperature Compensation is active)
NOU
• Oxide Thickness (when Oxide Measurement is active)
When a waveform is stored, the following additional information is stored with it:
• Zoom Status
• Horizontal Axis Limits
• Detection Marker Position
• Delay
• Range
• Rectification Mode
You can store a maximum of 60,000 thickness values without waveforms at any one time
in the Model 37DL PLUS. You can also store up to 4,500 thickness values with
waveforms.
10.2 Organizing the Datalogger

The Model 37DL PLUS datalogger is a flexible file based system. Every measurement
stored into the datalogger is tagged with an file name and identification number (ID
number). The file name and ID number may be thought of as the name of the place in the
gage memory where the measurement data is stored. This description usually corresponds
to the physical location numbers of each measurement point in the actual application. ID
numbers may also be associated with up to four Comments. The database can store a user
defined number of files with descriptive headers and each file has a user defined number
of identifiers.
When stored data is printed or loaded into a computer and later recalled back to the gage,
each measurement is always uniquely identified by the file name and ID number where it
was initially stored.
10.2.1 File Name Structure

File names consist of up to 32 alphanumeric characters. Allowable characters are as
follows:
0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
-.#
The total number of files is only limited by the number of identifiers. The file name is
limited to 32 DOS legal file name characters.
10.2.2 Identifier (ID Number) Structure

ID numbers consist of up to 20 alphanumeric characters. Allowable characters are as
follows:
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NOV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
0123456789
space - . / , : # *
The allowable number of ID numbers within a file is dependent on the total number of
identifiers in the datalogger. There are no restrictions on the use of any allowed character
at any position in an ID number except that you cannot use a space as either the first or last
character of the ID number.
10.2.3 File Name Header Structure

The file name header is a series of fields designed for additional descriptive information
pertaining to a file. These fields include the following:
File Description
Inspector ID
Location-Note
Each field in the header consists of from 0 to 32 alphanumeric characters. Allowable
characters are as follows:
0123456789
space - . / , : # *
There are no restrictions on the use of any allowed character at any position in a header
field except that you cannot use a space as either the first or last character of the ID
number.
The following screen shows the fields that are available in the header for user
customization:
Figure 82 Creating a File Name
NPM
10.2.4 Comment Structure

Use Comments to annotate individual measurement sites in the database for unusual
measurement conditions. Save these notes with or without the thickness measurement
data as a permanent record of conditions encountered at the time of the survey.
Typical Comments are:
• THIN AREA
• THICK AREA
• OUT OF TOLERANCE
• MIN THICKNESS
• MAX THICKNESS
• NO READING
• SEE WAVEFORM
A comment is a 16 character text note that can attach to a thickness reading in the database.
The gage is capable of storing a maximum of 26 different comments per file, each of
which is identified by a comment code letter A, B, ...Z. Comments are user definable for
each file and can be alphanumeric. You can store 1 to 4 comments per thickness reading.
Allowable characters are as follows:
0123456789
space - . / , : # *
There are no restrictions on the use of any allowed character at any position in a comment
except that you cannot use a space as either the first or last character of the ID number.
All comments stored with a reading appear as their associated letter code in the flags
section of the transmitted output. The full definition of each comment is written out in its
entirety in a comment table once transferred to a computer or printer.You can also view
Comment code definitions on the gage display as shown below.
Figure 83 Creating a Note
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NPN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
(See Creating or Editing Comment Tables from the Model 37DL PLUS on page 167 for
further instructions on using comments in the datalogger.)
10.3 Creating Data Files

Create Data Files for the Model 37DL PLUS datalogger from a computer or from within
the gage.
Throughout this section there are references to use the Model 37DL PLUS Standard
Editing Commands. These commands are described in the section below.
10.3.1 Standard Editing Commands

To enter a number at any character location, do the following:
Press any numeric key to change the character at the cursor to the digit selected and the
cursor automatically advances one position to the right.
To enter a letter or a symbol at any character location, follow these steps:
1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select a letter or punctuation mark.

2. Press and quickly release a slewing key to change the character by one value.
Hold down an arrow key to continuously cycle through the letters and punctuation
marks until the desired character is displayed.
Tip: The [ ] key moves forward from A to Z then * # : , / . - blank A etc. The [ ]
key moves backward from - . / , # : * Z to A blank - etc. After selecting an
alpha character, press [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor position to another
character.
NPO
Figure 84 Organization of Character Cycle
To insert a character at the cursor position, do the following:

Press [ZERO]. The character at the cursor and all those to the right moves one
position to the right, making a space for a new character.
To delete the character at the cursor position, do the following:

Press [VEL]. The character at the cursor is deleted and any characters to the right
moves left one position to fill-in the empty space.
10.3.2 Create Files from a Computer (using the optional WIN37DL PLUS)
See the WIN37DL PLUS Interface Program Instruction Manual (part number 910-249)
designed for use with the Model 37DL PLUS.
10.3.3 Create Files from the Model 37DL PLUS

To create files from the Model 37DL PLUS, follow these steps:
1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens:
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NPP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 85 Selecting the Create Option
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Create option.

3. Press [ENTER]. The following menu opens:
Figure 86 Selecting a File Type
4. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight a file type.

There are seven file types to choose from in the Model 37DL PLUS. (See page 135 to
page 157 for more information):
• Incremental
• Sequential
• Sequential with Custom Points
• 2-D Grid Matrix
• 2-D Grid Matrix with Custom Points
• 3-D Grid Matrix
• Boiler
Note: As the list of file types is scrolled through, the right hand side of the display
dynamically responds showing the required entry parameters to create the
specific file types.
5. Highlight a file type and press [ENTER].
NPQ
10.3.3.1 Incremental
After entering a starting ID number (up to 20 alphanumeric characters long) the gage
automatically increments to the subsequent ID numbers using the following incrementing
rules:
• Only that portion of an ID number consisting of digits and letters (no punctuation
marks) beginning with the right-most character and extending leftward to the first
punctuation mark or to the left-most character (whichever comes first) can increment.
• Digits are cycled 0, 1, 2, ..., 9, 0, etc. The 9 to 0 transition is done only after
incrementing the character to the left. Letters are cycled A, B, C, ..., Z, A, etc. The Z to
A transition is done only after incrementing the character to the left. In either case, if
there is no character to the left, or if the character to the left is a punctuation mark then
the ID number cannot increment.
• If an ID number cannot increment, then after a reading is saved, an long error beep
sounds and the momentary message “CANNOT INCREMENT” is shown on the
waveform display. Subsequent saves overwrite readings if you do not manually
change the ID number first.
Note: To make the gage increment through a range of numbers several digits wide
while beginning with a single digit ID number, the maximum number of
digit positions must be entered initially using leading zeroes. See Example 1.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NPR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Example 1: Some Automatically Generated Incremented ID Number Series
1. Initial 1 4. Initial 0001

2 0002
3 0003
. .
. .
. .
Limit 9 0009
0010
2. Initial ABC .
ABD .
ABE .
. Limit 9999
.
. 5. Initial 1A
ABZ 1B
ACA 1C
ACB .
. .
. .
. 1Z
Limit ZZZ 2A
2B
3. Initial ABC*12*34 .
ABC*12*35 .
ABC*12*36 .
. Limit 9Z
.
.
Limit ABC*12*99
NPS
To create an Incremental File, follow these steps:
1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens.

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Create option.The following screen opens:
Figure 87 Selecting an Incremental File Type
3. Select the Incremental option.

4. Enter the desired starting ID number for the data file. (See Standard Editing
Commands on page 132 for more detail about entering data.) Press [ENTER].
5. Press [ENTER]. The Continue option is highlighted.
6. Press [ENTER] to continue or press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Cancel option if
you want to cancel the operation.
Note: At any time, you can press [2nd F], [ ] or [2nd F], [ ] to scroll between
entry fields on the display. This is helpful if an error is made and you want to
scroll back to a previous field.
If you select the Continue option, the following screen opens:
Figure 88 Enter Incremental File Information
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NPT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
7. Enter a file name using the gages editing commands. A file name may consist of one
to 32 DOS legal characters. Press [ENTER].
Enter File Description, Inspector ID, and Location-Note fields using the same
process. After each entry, press [ENTER] to tab to the next field.
8. Select Normal, Temp Comp, or Thru Coat for the File Data Mode option by
pressing [ ] or [ ]. Press [ENTER].
Normal: Designates a file used to store standard thickness readings.
Temp Comp: Saves both material temperature and temperature compensation
thickness.
Thru Coat: Saves both material and coating thickness when using the Thru Coat
function.
Oxide Layer: Both the Material (boiler tube) and Internal Oxide thickness when using
the optional Oxide software.
Note: This selection will not be available if the optional Oxide software is not
loaded on the 37DL PLUS.
9. Select On or Off for the Delete Protection option by pressing [ ] or [ ]. Press

[ENTER].
On: Provides a warning whenever you try to delete the file.
Off: Allows the file to be deleted from the datalogger.
Note: In order to successfully create the file, a file name must be assigned. All other
fields in this screen are optional.
10. Select the Done or Cancel option by pressing [ ] and [ ]. Press [ENTER].
Cancel: The gage terminates the file create process and returns to the Measurement
mode with the file and ID number unchanged. The datalogger contents remain
unchanged. The file is not created.
Done: The gage returns to the Measurement mode with this new file as the active file
and the first ID number in the file as the active ID number.
10.3.3.2 Sequential
A Sequential File is defined by a starting and an ending ID number. The resulting file is
inclusive of the starting and ending points and all points in between.
Example 2: Start ID# = ABC123
End ID# = ABC135
Resulting file would contain the following list of ID numbers:
ABC123
ABC124
ABC125
NPU
.
.
.
ABC135
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NPV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Example 3: Start ID# = XY-GY

End ID# = XY-IB
XY-GY
XY-GZ
XY-HA
.
.
.
XY-IB
To create an Sequential file, follow these steps:

Figure 89 Selecting a Sequential File Type
3. Select the Sequential option.

5. Enter an ending ID number. Press [ENTER].
The Continue option is highlighted.
you wish to cancel the operation.
NQM
Figure 90 Entering Sequential File Information
thickness.
function.

[ENTER].
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NQN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
10.3.3.3 Sequential with Custom Point

A Sequential File with Custom Point is defined by a starting and an ending ID number plus
a series of custom points. The resulting file is inclusive of the starting and ending points
and all points in between. In addition, multiple thickness readings per ID number location
are assigned using the assigned custom points.
Example 4: This example describes measurements along a pipe or tube where at each
ID number location you can take measurements at Top, Bottom, Left and Right of the
pipe.
Starting ID# = XYZ1267
Ending ID# = XYZ1393
Custom Points = TOP

BOTTOM
LEFT
RIGHT
XYZ1267TOP
XYZ1267BOTTOM
XYZ1267LEFT
XYZ1267RIGHT
XYZ1268TOP
XYZ1268BOTTOM
XYZ1268LEFT
.
.
.
XYZ1393RIGHT
You can enter up to 20 custom points. The allowable length for each custom point depends
on the ID number length defined in the starting and ending ID number fields. The total
length of the ID number plus the custom points cannot exceed 20 characters. For example:
if the starting and ending ID numbers are seven characters long, as in the above example,
the maximum allowable length for each custom point is nine (20-7=13).
To create a Sequential with Custom Point file, follow these steps:

NQO
Figure 91 Selecting a Sequential with Custom Point File Type
3. Select the Sequential with Custom Point option.

5. Enter an ending ID number. Press [ENTER].
The Custom Point selection box is highlighted.
6. Enter the first custom point using the editing controls. Press [ENTER].
The gage proceeds to the next field for custom point entry.
7. Enter the second custom point and press [ENTER]. Continue this process until all
desired custom points are entered.
When finished entering custom points, press [ENTER] on a blank entry. The
Continue option is highlighted.
you want to cancel the operation.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NQP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 92 Entering Sequential with Custom Point File Information
thickness.
function.

[ENTER].
NQQ
10.3.3.4 2-D Matrix Grid

A grid is a sequence of ID numbers arranged to describe a path through a two-dimensional
or three-dimensional matrix. Each part of the ID number corresponds to a particular
matrix dimension.
A 2-D (two-dimensional) sequence begins with the ID number that refers to the first
column and the first row. Then the column (or row) increments one value at a time until the
sequence reaches the last column (or row) value while the other dimension value stays
constant. At this point the other dimension increments from its first to its last value. This
continues until the ID number that refers to the last column and last row is reached. Note,
either the columns or the rows can be selected to increment first. Refer to the following
figure.
Figure 93 General Grid Database
How is a grid used? A grid structure may associate one dimension of the grid (e.g., the
columns) with the physical parts whose wall thickness is to be measured. The particular
measurement points on each part are then associated with the other dimension of the grid
(e.g., the rows). Figure 94 on page 146.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NQR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 94 One Grid for 75 Identical Parts
Alternatively, the rows and columns of a grid may refer to a two dimensional map of
measurement points on the surface of one part. In this case a different grid is made for each
part. Figure 95 on page 147.
NQS
Name: Elbow
Rows: 01 thru 10
Columns: A thru E
ID’s: Elbow/A0 thru Elbow/E10
Name: Tee
Rows: 1 thru 4
Columns: 1 thru 3
ID’s: Tee/11 thru Tee/34
Figure 95 Different Named Grid for Each Part
To create a 2-D Grid file, follow these steps:

Figure 96 Selecting a 2D Grid File Type
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NQT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
3. Select the 2D Grid option.

5. Enter the desired ending column. Press [ENTER].
6. Enter the desired starting row for the grid. Press [ENTER].
7. Enter the ending row for the grid. Press [ENTER].
8. Press [ ] or [ ], when ID Format is highlighted, to select the STD or EPRI
option. Press [ENTER].
STD (standard): Refer to the standard incrementing columns that start at A and
extend past Z. Example: Start Column: A; End Column: AD; Column Result: A, B,
C...X, Y, Z, AA, AB, AC, AD.
EPRI: Refer to custom incrementing columns that start at A and extend past Z.
Expample: Start Column: A; End Column: CC; Column Result: A, B, C...Z, AA, BB,
CC.
9. Press [ ] or [ ] to select a column or a row for the increment method. Press
[ENTER].
Note: At any time [2nd F], [ ] or [2nd F], [ ] may be pressed to scroll between
Figure 97 Entering 2D Grid File Information
NQU
to eight DOS legal characters. Press [ENTER].
thickness.
function.

[ENTER].

Note: The Model 37DL PLUS has the ability to add a row, add a column, and
change the incrementing direction after a grid file is created. See Editing/
Renaming a File on page 164.
10.3.3.5 2-D Matrix Grid with Custom Point

A grid is a sequence of ID numbers arranged to describe a path through a two-dimensional
or three-dimensional matrix. Each part of the ID number corresponds to a particular
matrix dimension. See 2-D Matrix Grid on page 145 for more information.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NQV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Custom points allow multiple readings per Grid ID number to be assigned.
NRM
Example 5:
Start Column A
End Column J (Start Grid Coordinate = A01)
Start Row 01
Start Row 17 (End Grid Coordinate = J17
Custom Points = LEFT
CENTER
RIGHT
A01LEFT
A01CENTER
A01RIGHT
A02LEFT
.
.
.
J17RIGHT
To create a 2-D Grid with Custom Points file, follow these steps:

Figure 98 Selecting a 2-D Grid with Custom Points File Type
3. Select the 2-D Grid with Custom Points option.

4. Enter the desired starting column for the grid. (See Standard Editing Commands on
page 132 for more detail about entering data.) Press [ENTER].
Note: The columns of the Model 37DL PLUS can increment past Z. Example: Start
Column: A; End Column: AC; Column Result: A, B, C...Z, AA, AB, AC.
5. Enter the ending column. Press [ENTER].
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NRN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
6. Enter the starting row for the grid. Press [ENTER].

1. Enter the first custom point using the editing controls. Press [ENTER]. The gage
proceeds to the next line for custom point entry.
2. Enter the second custom point. Press [ENTER]. Continue this process until all
desired custom points are entered. (You can enter a maximum of 20 custom points.)
When finished entering custom points, press [ENTER] on a blank entry.
The Increment First By selection is highlighted.
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to select column, row or point as the first increment method. Press
[ENTER].
The Increment Second By selection is highlighted.
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select column, row or point as the second increment method.
Press [ENTER].
Figure 99 Entering 2D Grid with Custom Points File Information
NRO
process. After each entry press [ENTER] to tab to the next field.
thickness.
function.

[ENTER].
9. Select the Done or Cancel option by pressing [ ] and [ ] . Press [ENTER].

Note: The Model 37DL PLUS has the ability to add a row, add a column, and
change the incrementing direction after a grid file is created. See Editing/
Renaming a File on page 164.
10.3.3.6 3-D Matrix Grid

A 3-D Matrix Grid is a sequence of multi-part ID numbers arranged to describe a path
through a three-dimensional matrix. Each part of the ID number corresponds to a
particular matrix dimension.
A 3-D (three-dimensional) sequence begins with the ID number that refers to the first
column, the first row and the first point. Then the point (or column, or row) increments one
value at a time until the sequence reaches the last point (or column, or row) value while the
other two dimension values stay constant. At this point another dimension increments
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NRP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
from its first to its last value. This continues until the ID number that refers to the last
column, last row and last point is reached. You can select either the columns, rows or
points to increment first.
How is a 3-D Grid Used? A three-dimensional grid structure may associate two-
dimensions of the grid (e.g., the columns and rows) with the physical coordinates on the
part whose wall thickness is to be measured. The particular measurement points on each
part are then associated with the third dimension of the grid (e.g., the points). This scenario
allows multiple readings to be stored at each grid coordinate.
Example 6:
Start Column = A
End Column = F
Start Row = 1
End Row = 4
Start Point = X
End Point = Z
Resulting file would contain the following list of ID numbers
A1X
A1Y
A1Z
A2X
.
.
.
A4Z
B1X
B1Y
.
.
.
F4Z
Note: You can select which dimension increments first, second and third. The
example above assumes that you chose to increment the point first, the row
second and the column third.
To create a 3-D Grid with Custom Points file, follow these steps:

NRQ
Figure 100 Selecting a 3-D Grid with Custom Points File Type
3. Select the 3-D Grid option.

4. Enter the desired starting column for the grid. (See Standard Editing Commands on
page 132 for more detail about entering data.) Press [ENTER].
5. Enter the desired ending column. Press [ENTER].
Note: The columns of the Model 37DL PLUS can increment past Z. Example: Start
Column: A; End Column: AC; Column Result: A, B, C...Z, AA, AB, AC.
6. Enter the desired starting row for the grid. Press [ENTER].
8. Enter the starting point for the grid. Press [ENTER].
9. Enter the ending point for the grid. Press [ENTER].
The Increment First By selection is highlighted
1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select column, row or point as the increment method. Press

[ENTER].
The Increment Second By selection is highlighted
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to select column, row or point. Press [ENTER].
The Continue option is highlighted
3. Press [ENTER] to continue. Alternately, press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Cancel if
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NRR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 101 Entering 3D Grid File Information
Enter File Description, Inspector ID, and Location-Note field using the same process.
After each entry press [ENTER] to tab to the next field.
thickness.
function.

[ENTER].
NRS
10.3.3.7 Boiler
A Boiler file is a special file type designed specifically for boiler applications A common
method for identifying a thickness measurement location is by a three dimensional
approach. The first dimension is Elevation, which refers to the physical distance from the
bottom to the top of the boiler. The second dimension is Tube Number, which refers to
the number of boiler tubes that need inspection. The third dimension is the Custom Point,
which refers to the actual thickness reading location at the specified elevation on the
specified tube. When these three dimensions are combined a single ID number is formed
to precisely identify the exact location of each thickness reading. For example:
Example 7:
Elevations = 10ft-, 20ft-, 45ft-, 100ft-
Start tube = 01
End tube = 73
Custom points = L, C, R (left, center, right)
The resulting file would contain the following list of ID numbers:

10ft-01L
10ft-01C
10ft-01R
10ft-02L
.
.
.
10ft-73R
20ft-01L
.
.
.
100ft-73R
(This example assumes that you chose to increment the custom piont first, tube
number second, and elevation third. You can choose alternate incrementing
methods.)
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NRT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
To create a Boiler file, follow these steps:

Figure 102 Selecting a Boiler File Type
3. Select the Boiler option.

4. Enter the desired starting tube number for the grid. (See Standard Editing Commands
on page 132 for more detail about entering data.) Press [ENTER].
5. Enter the desired ending tube number. Press [ENTER].
6. Enter the first custom point using the editing controls. Press [ENTER].
The gage proceeds to the next line for custom point entry.
7. Edit the second custom point and press [ENTER].
Continue this process until all desired custom points have been entered. When
finished entering custom points press [ENTER] on a blank entry.
The Elevation selection box is highlighted.
8. Enter the first desired elevation using the editing controls. Press [ENTER].
The gage proceeds to the next line for elevation entry.
9. Edit the second elevation and press [ENTER].
Continue this process until all desired elevation have been entered. When finished
entering elevation press [ENTER] on a blank entry. A maximum of 200 elevations
can be entered.
The Increment First By selection is highlighted.
NRU
1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select ELE, TUB, or point as the increment method. Press

[ENTER].
The Increment Second By selection is highlighted.
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to select ELE, TUB, or point. Press [ENTER].
Figure 103 Entering Boiler File Information
Enter File Description, Inspector ID, and Location-Note field using the same process.
After each entry press [ENTER] to tab to the next field.
thickness.
function.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NRV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp

[ENTER].

10.4 Opening a File

Use the File Open function to retrieve a file stored in the datalogger and mark it as the
active file in the Measurement mode.
To open a File, follow these steps:
1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens.:
Figure 104 Selecting Open Option
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Open option. Press [ENTER]. The following
screen opens:
NSM
Figure 105 Opening a File
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the name of a file to open. Press [ ] or [ ] to move

forward or backward to the next group of alphanumerical files.
4. Press [ENTER].
The Open option is highlighted.
Note: When scrolling through the file names, a descriptive header for the
highlighted file name appears on the lower section of the display. This
information can assist in selecting the proper file if you are uncertain of the
exact file name.
5. Press [ENTER] to confirm opening the file. If you want to terminate the action press
[ ] or [ ] to highlight the Cancel option. Press [ENTER].
If you select the Open option, the gage returns to the Measurement mode with the
selected file as the active file and the ID number is set to the first ID number in the file.
10.5 Copying a File

You can duplicate a file that already exists in the datalogger by using the File Copy
function. This function provides two options:
• Copy the entire file including stored thickness data
• Copy the file ID number structure only
The File Copy function is useful when a new file needs to be created with the exact same
structure as a previous file.
To copy a file, follow these steps:
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NSN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 106 Selecting the Copy Option
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Copy option. Press [ENTER]. The following menu
opens:
Figure 107 Copying a File
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the name of the file that the new file is being copied
from. Press [ENTER].
4. Use the Model 37DL PLUS editing controls to input the name of the new file being
created. Press [ENTER].
The Include Thickness Data option is highlighted.
5. Press [ ] and [ ] to choose Yes or No. Press [ENTER].
This selection determines if previously stored thickness readings from the original file
are copied into the new file. If you select No, the ID Numbers are copied, but the
thickness field is left blank.
The Copy option is highlighted.
6. Press [ENTER] to confirm the File Copy.
If you wish to terminate the File Copy, press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Cancel
option and press [ENTER].
7. Use the File Open commands to activate the newly copied file. (See Opening a File on
page 160.)
NSO
10.6 Deleting a File

The File Delete function is used to Erase files from the datalogger memory.
Note: Once a file is deleted there is no way to recover any information that was
once contained in that file unless it has previously been copied to another file
or transferred to a computer. Files that are Delete Protected cannot be deleted
until Delete Protection is disabled using the File Edit Rename feature. (See
Editing/Renaming a File on page 164.)
There are two methods for deleting a file.
To delete a file stored in the Model 37DL PLUS, follow these steps:
Figure 108 Selecting the Delete Option
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Delete option. Press [ENTER]. The following
menu opens:
Figure 109 Deleting a File
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the name of a file to delete.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NSP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
4. Press [ENTER] to select and place the check mark next to the file you want to delete.
To deselect a file, highlight the file name and press [ENTER] to remove the check
mark.
Note: When scrolling through the file names, a descriptive header for the
highlighted file name appears on the lower section of the display. This
information can assist in selecting the proper file if you are uncertain of the
exact file name.
5. When you are done selecting the files to delete, press [2nd F], [ ] and the Delete
option is highlighted.
6. Press [ ] or [ ] to select between Delete Stored Data or Entire File options. Press
[ENTER].
7. Press [ENTER] on the Delete option to confirm erasing data. If you wish to terminate
this process press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Cancel option and press [ENTER].
To delete an active file or a range of data in a file, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [FILE] (CLR MEM). The ID - Range CLR screen opens:
Figure 110 Deleting an Active File
2. Use the editing function to define the beginning ID location. Press [ENTER].
3. Use the editing function to define the ending ID location. Press [ENTER].
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Delete option and press [ENTER].
10.7 Editing/Renaming a File

Using the Editing-Rename function gives you the ability to edit file header information,
disable File Delete Protection, add rows or columns to a grid file, and change the
incrementing order of data. You can also change one or all of the following fields in a file:
• File Name
• File Description
• Inspector ID
• Location-Note
NSQ
• Delete Protection (On/Off)

• End row, column, or point of a grid file
• Incrementing order of a file
This function does not let you edit the File type and is not used for editing individual
Measurement Identifiers or actual Thickness Readings.
Figure 111 Selecting the Edit-Rename Option
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Edit-Rename option. Press [ENTER]. The File
Edit-Rename screen opens:
Figure 112 Entering New File Information
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the name of the file to edit or rename. Press [ENTER].
You can now edit the fields in the lower section of the display with the exception of the
File Type. The first field highlighted is the file name field. Edit this field using the
Model 37DL PLUS Standard Editing Controls. (See Standard Editing Commands on
page 132.)
Note: While scrolling through the file names in the database, the lower section of
the display will dynamically display the descriptive file header information
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NSR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
for each file. This will assist in choosing the proper file if the file name is
unknown.
4. Press [ENTER] after completing the edits. The File Description field for editing is
highlighted.
Continue this procedure until all desired fields are edited. At any time press [2nd F],
[ ] and [2nd F], [ ] to move from one field to another.
5. When you finish editing file header information on a non-grid file, the gage will
highlight the Done or Cancel option. Press the [ ] or [ ] to select Done and press
[ENTER] to save the changes, or select Cancel to cancel the changes leaving the file
header unchanged.
6. When you finish editing file header information on a grid file, the gage will highlight
the Continue or Cancel option. Press the [ ] or [ ] to select Continue and the
gage will display the Grid Edit screen.
Figure 113 Displaying the Grid Edit Screen
This screen allows you to change the ending column, row, point, and also change the
incrementing order of the file.
Note: You can increase the size of a grid file, but you cannot decrease it.
7. When you are done editing the ending row, column, or point, the Done or Cancel
option will be highlighted. Press the [ ] or [ ] to select Done to finish editing and
return to the Measure screen, or select Cancel to cancel all the changes and return to
the Measure screen.
NSS
10.8 Creating or Editing Comment Tables from a

Computer
Using a computer to create comment tables is faster and easier than manually creating
them on the Model 37DL PLUS. For details see the WIN37DL PLUS Interface Program
Instruction Manual (part number 910-249) designed for use with the Model 37DL PLUS.
10.9 Creating or Editing Comment Tables from the Model

37DL PLUS
To create or edit comment tables, follow these steps:
1. Open the file that contains the Comment Table that you want to edit by using the File
Open option. (See Opening a File on page 160.)
2. Press [2nd F], [ID#] (NOTE).
If there are no previous comments, the Notes screen opens.
Figure 114 Entering Information for the Comment Table
Note: If there are any previous comments, the screen may show those comments.
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the letter code for the comment you wish to program. A
comment is assigned a letter code A-Z.
4. Press [ ] and [ ] to activate the Edit mode. (See Standard Editing Commands on
page 132 for more detail about entering data.)
10.9.1 Delete Comments from a Comment Table

To delete a particular comment text, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [ID#] (Note).
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NST
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
2. Press [ ] or [ ] until the desired comment to delete is highlighted.

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to enter Edit mode.
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor.
5. Press [VEL] to delete the characters in the comment. The comment text will be erased.
Deleting comment text does not delete comment codes from the measurement
database.
Note: The text of comment codes that are already stored with measurements in the
current database should not be deleted since that destroys the meaning of the
stored codes. You can delete the text for unused comment codes at any time.
10.9.2 Copy a Note

The Note Copy function can be used to copy a note table from one file to another file in
the Model 37DL PLUS. This is very useful when you are creating files from the Model
37DL PLUS and want to use a common note table.
To Copy a Note Table, follow these steps:

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Note-Copy option. Press [ENTER].
Figure 115 Selecting the Note-Copy Option
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the file (source file) that contains the Note Table you
want to copy. Press [ENTER].
NSU
Figure 116 Selecting a Note to Copy
4. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the file (destination file) that you want to copy. Press
[ENTER].
5. Press [ ] and [ ] to select the Copy option or Cancel option. Press [ENTER].
Note: Copying a comment table to a file that has existing stored comments may
redefine the meaning of existing stored comments. For example, if A = Hot
Surfaces in the original comment table and you copy a comment table where
A = Painted Surfaces, it changes the definition of A, and thus changes the
meaning of any previous stored A comments.
10.9.3 Database Tracking

See Database Tracking on page 95.
10.10 Saving Data

Store displayed thickness value or both the thickness and waveform in the datalogger
pressing [SAVE]. All of the appropriate calibration and setup parameters are also stored
simultaneously. (See Understanding the Datalogger on page 127 for a complete
description of what is stored in the datalogger.)
If a measurement is already stored at the current ID number, pressing [SAVE] overwrites
the old thickness reading with the current thickness reading unless the overwrite
protection feature is enabled. (See ID Overwrite Protection on page 92.)
If you do not want to save a measurement at a specific ID, press [SAVE] while no
measurement is taken. The gage will store an LOS condition and —-.—- at the specific ID
number.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NSV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
10.10.1 Save Thickness Readings

To save a thickness reading, do the following:
While the thickness value is being displayed, press [SAVE].

An audible beep indicates that the reading is saved. The displayed thickness value and
setup information is stored at the current ID number in the current file. If the thickness
display is blank when [SAVE] is pressed, then “——-” is saved in place of a value.
ID number is indicated on the display. If the ID number cannot be updated a long beep
sounds and the gage displays a message explaining why the ID was unable to update. In
this case, the ID number on the display remains unchanged.
Some of the special features of the Model 37DL PLUS allow the gage to store more than
one thickness value or thickness and temperature at an ID location. For this reason, the
gage has four different file types for saving data:
• Thickness: Standard one thickness saved.
• Thru-Coat: Saving thickness of coating and thickness of steel.
• Temperature Compensation: Saving thickness of steel and temperature.
• Oxide Thickness: Saving thickness of steel and thickness of inside oxide space.
Only one type of data can be stored in a file. The Model 37DL PLUS automatically
designates the file type based on the first thickness reading saved in the file. The gage does
not let you store different file type data in a single file.
10.10.2 Save Thickness and Waveform

To save a thickness and waveform, do the following:
While the thickness value is displayed, press [2nd F], [SAVE].

An audible beep indicates that the reading is saved. The displayed thickness value,
waveform and setup information are stored at the current ID number in the current file. If
the thickness display is blank when you press [SAVE], then “——-” is saved in place of a
value.
ID number is indicated on the display. If the ID number cannot be updated a long beep
sounds and the gage displays a message explaining why the ID was unable to update. In
this case, the ID number on the display remains unchanged.
10.10.3 Save Comments

Up to four comments may be stored at each identifier within a file.
To save a comment, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [ID#] (Note). The Notes table opens, similar to the display shown
below.
NTM
Figure 117 Selecting a Comment from the Notes Table
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the desired comment to be stored. Press [ENTER]. The
selected comment is marked with a square in the box to the left of the comment letter
code.
Repeat this step up to four comments.
3. Press [MEAS/RESET]. The next time [SAVE] is pressed these comment codes will
be saved with the thickness at the current ID number.
(See Creating or Editing Comment Tables from the Model 37DL PLUS on page 167
for more information.)
Note: The comment codes are automatically untagged every time you press
[SAVE]. Therefore, you must select the desired comment code before using
it.
10.11 Using the Review ID Mode

The review ID mode has three purposes:
• Review datalogger contents by scanning through stored ID locations in the active file.
• Move within the database and change the current ID location to any location that
already exists in the database.
• Change the current ID location to any location that already exists in the database for
the purposes of editing that ID location.
To review stored thickness values and waveforms or move to an existing id location,
follow these steps:
1. From the Measurement mode, press [ID#]. The following data is displayed on the
screen:
• Current ID Location
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NTN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
• Current File Name

• Stored Thickness Value
• Stored Waveform (if any) with Status Flags (described in figure below)
• Stored Comments or Notes
Datalogger Flags: The area composed of four small boxes in the upper right corner of
the waveform area is reserved for status flags describing the displayed stored
thickness values. The flags are the same single letter abbreviations for status words
that are transmitted by the gage using the Sending commands. (See Managing
Communications/Data Transfer on page 199.) The flags that are defined for each box
are described in the figure below.
The Review mode is indicated by ID Review section in the center of the display. An
example is shown in the figure below:
M: Standard Measurement
L: Standard LOS
E: AE to E Measurement
l: AE to E LOS
e: ME to E Measurement
n: ME to E LOS
1: Mode 1 Meas
2: Mode 2 Meas
3: Mode 3 Meas
a: Mode 1 LOS
b: Mode 2 LOS
c: Mode 3 LOS
Differential Mode Percent Previous Mode

D: Diff Absolute p: Prev Thk % Alarm
d: Diff Percentage r: Prev Thk % Low Alarm
g: Prev Thk % High Alarm
Standard Alarm
A: Alarm Standard Absolute Previous Alarm Mode
G: Gain Modified H: High Alarm Standard a: Prev Thk Absolute Alarm
m: MIN L: Low Alarm Standard l: Prev Thk Absolute Low Alarm
M: MAX -: No Alarm/Diff h: Prev Thk Absolute High Alarm
Figure 118 Identifying the Review ID Mode
Measurements are disabled in this mode.

2. Press [ ] to display the next ID Location in the datalogger and its stored contents.
3. Press [ ] to display the previous ID Location and its stored contents.You can either
press [ ] and [ ] repeatedly or hold down either key to review the datalogger.
4. Press [2nd F], [ ] to jump to the last ID Location in the file. Press [2nd F], [ ] to
jump the first ID Location in the file.
5. Press [ID#] at any time to edit the displayed ID Location. (See Using the Edit ID Mode
on page 173.)
6. Press [MEAS/RESET] to return to the Measurement mode with the current ID
Location changed to the ID Location selected in the ID Review mode.
NTO
10.12 Using the Edit ID Mode

The ID Edit mode is generally used for one of two purposes:
• To change the current ID Location to a different ID Location already in the database.

This mode is useful when you are using a large database and it would take too long to
locate the desired ID by pressing [ ] and [ ].
• To change the current ID Location to a new ID, which does not yet exist in the
database. This mode is useful when you want to include additional measurement
points to the active file. Additional ID Locations can be added anywhere in the
database (beginning, middle, end.)
Note: No stored data is shown while in ID Edit mode and no measurements can be
made.
To use the ID Edit mode, follow these steps:
1. Press [ID#] from the Measurement mode.

The current ID Location, including the stored thickness contents (if any), stored
waveform (if any), and stored comments/notes (if any), are displayed on the ID
Review screen. (See Using the Review ID Mode on page 171.)
2. Use the ID Review mode techniques to select the ID Location to begin editing.
3. To enable the ID Edit mode, press [ID#] again and the following editing screen
opens:
Figure 119 Enabling the ID Edit Mode
An editing cursor (reverse video) appears on the first character of the displayed ID
Location, as shown on the above screen. (See Standard Editing Commands on page
132 for more detail about entering data.)
Choose one of the following three steps to exit editing at any time:
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NTP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
1. Press [MEAS/RESET] to return to the Measurement mode with the Current ID

Location modified as displayed.
If the edited ID is NOT in the database, the following screen opens:
Figure 120 Example of Screen if Edited ID is Not in the Database
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Insert, Append, or Cancel option.

The Append option has the edited ID number appended to the end of the file.
The Insert option has the edited ID inserted before the current ID Location.
3. Press [SAVE] with or without an active measurement in order for the edited ID to
become a permanent part of the database. After pressing [SAVE], the sequence
resumes at the previous current ID.
4. Press [ID#] to Return to the ID Review mode with the Displayed ID modified as
edited. The ID Review mode is entered with the ID selected in the Edit mode. If this
number is not in the database, it will be lost when any review key is pressed.
10.13 Erasing Data
Note: Data erased by the techniques below CANNOT be recovered.
10.13.1 Erase Data in the Active/Open File

To erase a single measurement, follow these steps:
1. Press [ID#] while in the Measurement mode, to enter the ID Review mode. The
current ID number is shown with its stored data.
2. Press [ ] and [ ] or the edit keys to change to the ID number to be erased. (See Using
the Edit ID Mode on page 173.)
NTQ
3. Press [2nd F], [FILE] (Clr Mem) to erase the data at the displayed ID number, the
thickness value, the setup information, and the waveform. The displayed ID number
changes to the next ID number in the sequence following the one erased.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NTR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Note: To replace a thickness reading it is easier to save a new measurement at the

desired ID from the Measurement mode. If you do not want to save a
measurement at a specific ID, press [SAVE] from the Measurement mode
when you are not taking a measurement. This stores an LOS condition and —
-.—- at the specific ID number.
Note: When deleting an ID number in a Sequential or Incremental file, the ID

number location is also deleted. In all file types, only the thickness/
waveform is deleted.
To erase a range of measurements, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [FILE] (CLR MEM) from the Measurement mode.
2. Enter the starting range ID and ending range ID.
3. Press [ENTER].
4. Select the Delete or Cancel option and press [Enter].
10.13.2 Erase a File

See Deleting a File on page 163.
10.13.3 Erase the Entire Database

Caution: Erasing the entire Database erases all files and data contained in those files. The
datalogger will be completely empty after this procedure.
1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SETUP). The Setup mode menu opens:
Figure 121 Selecting the Resets Option
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Resets option. Press [ENTER]. The following
screen opens:
NTS
Figure 122 Selecting the DBase Reset Option
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the DBase Reset option. Press [ENTER]. The
following screen opens:
Figure 123 Warning Message when Resetting DBase
4. Press [ENTER] to confirm, or press [MEAS/RESET] to abort DBASE Reset.
10.14 Using the Optional Bar Code Wand to Enter an ID

Number
GE Panametrics offers a non-contact Bar Code Wand for the Model 37DL PLUS (Part
#36DLP/BCW). The purpose of using a Bar Code Wand is to provide a method for the
gage to automatically edit the current ID number to match that of a bar code label.
To use the Bar Code Wand to enter an ID number, follow these steps:
1. Verify the communication parameters are set to the following values:
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NTT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Baud Rate: 19200

Word Length: 8
Parity: None
Stop Bits: 1
2. Plug the GE Panametrics Bar Code Wand into the RS-232 Connector on the Model
37DL PLUS.
3. Scan the Bar Code Wand on the special ID Code Label.
When using the non-contact wand, position the scanner over the bar code label (0.0 -
2.00" or 0 - 50mm away from the label) and press the trigger button.
The ID number changes to the value coded on the label and the gage returns to the
Measurement mode, ready to take a measurement.
4. Press [SAVE] to save a measurement.The current ID number is displayed in the ID
section of the screen (top left).
Note: Print labels on medium density 3 of 9 code. Consult GE Panametrics for

further information on label requirements.
10.15 Generating Reports

The Model 37DL PLUS is capable of generating inspection data reports from within the
gage without having to connect to a computer or printer. The following reports are
available:
• File Summary with Statistics Report
• Min/Max Summary
• File Comparison Report
• Alarm Report
To generate a report, follow these steps:
1. Press [FILE]. The File Option menu opens:
Figure 124 Selecting the Reports Option
NTU
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Reports option. Press [ENTER]. The following
menu opens:
Figure 125 Selecting the File Summary with Stats Option
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the desired report. Press [ENTER]. Choose from the
following reports:
• Summary with Statistics Report
• Min/Max Summary
• File Compression
• Alarm Report
If you select the Summary with Statistics Report option, the File Summary w/ Stats
screen opens.
Figure 126 Selecting a File to View
1. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the desired file name.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NTV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
2. Press [ENTER] to view the statistics.

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Report or Cancel option. Press [ENTER] and the File
Summary with Statistics Report opens.
If you select the Min/Max Summary option, the following screen opens.
Figure 127 Viewing File if Min/Max Summary is Selected
1. Press [ ] and [ ] to select the file and press [ENTER].

2. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Report or Cancel option. Press [ENTER].
If you select Report, the Min/Max Report opens with the first min ID # highlighted.
Figure 128 Reviewing the Min/Max Summary Report
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to scroll through the minimum thickness locations.
NUM
4. Press [ENTER] to highlight the maximum thickness locations.

5. Press [ ] and [ ] to slew through the maximum thickness locations.
6. Press [2nd F], [ ] or [2nd F], [ ] to move between min thickness and maximum
thickness.
7. Press [ENTER], when Cancel is highlighted, to close the Min/Max Report.
If File Comparison Report is chosen the following screen opens.
Figure 129 Viewing File if File Comparison is Selected
1. Press [ ] and [ ] to select the Reference file (original file) and press [ENTER].
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to select the Comparison file (latest file).
If you select the Report option, the File Comparison Report opens and the first
maximum wall loss location is highlighted.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NUN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 130 Reviewing the Comparison Summary Report
4. Press [ ] and [ ] to review all Maximum Wall Loss locations.

5. Press [ENTER] to move to the Wall Growth ID # list.
6. Press [ ] and [ ] to scroll through the Wall Growth ID # list.
7. Press [2nd F], [ ] or [2nd F], [ ] to switch between the Maximum Wall Loss and
Wall Growth list.
8. Press [ENTER] to close the File Compression Report.
If Alarm Report is chosen the following screen opens.
Figure 131 Viewing File if Alarm Report is Selected
1. Press [ ] and [ ] to select the file and press [ENTER].
NUO

If you select the Report option, the File Comparison Report opens and the first
maximum wall loss location is highlighted.
Figure 132 Reviewing Alarm Summary Report
3. Press [2nd F], [ ] or [2nd F], [ ] to switch between the Lo Alarm IDs and the Hi
Alarm IDs.
4. Press [ENTER] to close the Alarm Report.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NUP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
NUQ
`ìëíçã=pÉíìéë=Ñçê=páåÖäÉ=bäÉãÉåí=qê~åëÇìÅÉêë
11 Custom Setups for Single Element

Transducers
In addition to providing programmed standard transducer setups, the Model 37DL PLUS
permits you to create custom setups by changing a series of pulser/receiver and gating
parameters. Use custom setups when the measurement requirements of a particular
application are not optimally met by one of the standard setups. In some cases, a Model
37DL PLUS ships from the factory pre-programmed with one or more custom setups to
meet special customer requirements. However, you may want to create your own custom
setups. Once adjustments are made, you can name and store these setup parameters in one
of the 10 user defined setup locations. This feature gives the Model 37DL PLUS the
flexibility to change quickly between transducer and application setups by selecting the
setup name from a stored list.
Note: The adjustments described in this section should be made only by a qualified
technician who is familiar with the basic theory of ultrasonic gaging and the
interpretation of ultrasonic waveforms.
Many of these adjustments are interactive, and all of them have an effect on the
measurement range and/or measurement accuracy of the Model 37DL PLUS. In most
cases, do not attempt adjustments without monitoring waveforms. Additionally, when
establishing a custom setup for a specific application, it is essential to verify performance
on reference standards representing the material(s) and thickness range to measure.
• Managing the Detect Mode Function
• Defining a Setup Name
• Defining Measurement Type
• Defining a Probe Type
• Varying Pulser Power
• Adjusting Maximum Gain
• Adjusting Initial Gain
• Adjusting TDG Slope
• Adjusting the Main Bang Blank
• Adjusting the Echo Window
11.1 Managing the Detect Mode Function

The Detect Mode function selects Mode 1, Mode 2, or Mode 3 measurements. See
DtectMode and EchWindow Parameters on page 192 for further explanation.
Mode 1: Measures the time of flight between the Main Bang and the first backwall echo
using a direct contact transducer.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NUR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Main Bang
First Backwall
Figure 133 Detect Mode 1
Mode 2: Measures the time of flight between the interface (or delay line) echo and the first
backwall echo using a delay line or immersion transducer.
Main Bang
First Backwall
Interface
Mode 3: Measures the time of flight between one backwall echo to the next backwall echo
using a delay line or immersion transducer.
NUS
Interface
Second Backwall
First
Backwall
11.2 Defining a Setup Name

A user defined name has up to 16 alphanumeric characters used to name and describe the
stored setup.
11.3 Defining Measurement Type

The Model 37DL PLUS offers three measurement types: Standard, Oxide Layer, and
EMAT. The Standard measurement type refers to a normal Mode 1, 2, and 3
measurements. Oxide Layer measurement type uses a special advanced algorithm to
measure the thickness of steel boiler type measurements and the thickness of internal
oxide simultaneously. EMAT mode is employed when using the E110-SB EMAT
transducer.
11.4 Defining a Probe Type

The probe type indicates the transducer type selected in the Active Setup. Each probe type
selected should match the frequency of the transducer being used for proper Pulser/
Receiver performance.
11.5 Varying Pulser Power

You can adjust the excitation pulse (Main Bang) voltage in three steps of 30, 60, and 110
Volts. Higher voltages may provide greater penetration at the expense of near surface
resolution, especially in Mode 1, while lower voltages may provide better near surface
resolution at the expense of penetration. For most applications the 110 Volt setting
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NUT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
provides the best signal-to-noise ratio for returning echoes. The Pulser Power does the
following:
• Indicates the voltage used to drive the transducer that is selected
• Affects the amount of energy going into the transducer and the size of the Initial Pulse
Initial Pulse
Figure 136 Pulser Power Set to 30 Volts Shows a Smaller Initial Pulse
Initial Pulse
Figure 137 Pulser Power Set to 110 Volts Shows a Larger Initial Pulse
11.6 Adjusting Maximum Gain

You can adjust the maximum available receiver gain from 0.0dB to 79.98dB. The Model
37DL PLUS uses Automatic Gain Control (AGC) and Time Dependent Gain (TDG)
functions to automatically adjust receiver gain to an optimum level when an echo is
detected. When no echo is detected (LOS prompt), the gain rises to the maximum level set
by the Initial Gain, Slope, and Maximum Gain. If the maximum gain is set too high, the
gage may hang up on transducer noise or other spurious signals; if it is set too low,
returning echoes may not be high enough for detection.
NUU
In general, for a given application the Max Gain should be set high enough that all echoes
of interest are detected, but a steady LOS prompt is displayed when the transducer is not
coupled to a test piece. The Max Gain indicates the Maximum (time dependent) receiver
gain possible and is used to amplify echoes that are further out in time.
Note: The Max Gain can never be lower then Initial Gain and has a maximum value
of 79.98dB.
TDG SLOPE Max Gain
Initial
Time
Figure 138 Maximum Gain
11.7 Adjusting Initial Gain

Initial Gain and TDG Slope are part of a Time Dependent Gain system that may be used to
optimize near-surface resolution while providing a higher maximum gain for thicker
samples. You can adjust the Initial Gain from 0dB to the maximum defined by the Max
Gain setting. This parameter sets an upper limit on receiver gain in the vicinity of the
excitation pulse (Mode 1) or interface echo (Modes 2 and 3). By effectively making the
excitation pulse or interface echo smaller, the TDG system permits detection of echoes
occurring close to pulse or echo in time.
The TDG system is also used in measurements of highly scattering materials, such as cast
metals and fiberglass, to minimize detection of scatter echoes occurring ahead of the
backwall. From the initial gain level, receiver gain slopes up to the maximum gain level at
the rate determined by the TDG Slope setting. The Initial Gain setting is most critical in
applications where minimum thickness measurements must be optimized, and should
always be set with the aid of a reference standard representing that minimum. In cases
where the minimum thickness capability is less important than penetration, and scatter
echoes are not a problem, Initial Gain can be set equal to Max Gain. The Initial Gain does
the following:
• Indicates the initial (time dependent) receiver gain currently selected
• Amplifies echoes that are close to the Main Bang or interface echoes
• Starts at Time Zero and extends to:
– the Main Bang Blank in Mode 1
– the end of the Interface Blank in Mode 2 and 3
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NUV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
TDG SLOPE Max Gain

Initial
Time
Figure 139 Initial Gain
11.8 Adjusting TDG Slope

The Time Dependent Gain (TDG) Slope function controls the rate at which the receiver
gain slopes up from the Initial Gain level to the Max Gain level. You can set the Slope from
0.0 to 26.5dB per microsecond. Generally, TDG Slope should be set as high as possible to
reach maximum gain as quickly as possible without having the gage hang up on spurious
signals.
• Rate of increase of the receiver (Time dependent) Gain from Initial Gain to Max Gain
• Slope helps suppress reflections from grain structure or fibers
• Slope adjusts from 0.0dB to 26.52 dB/µSec
• Point in time that the Gain starts to slope is:
– the Main Bang Blank in Mode 1
– the End of the Interface Blank in Mode 2 and 3
TDG SLOPE Max Gain

Initial
Time
Figure 140 TDG Slope
11.9 Adjusting the Main Bang Blank

The Main Bang Blank is effectively a blank zone that protects the receiver from false
readings generated by the Main Bang. This blank or dead zone (up to 18 microseconds
from the excitation pulse) prevents you from detecting echoes of the trailing edge of the
excitation pulse as if it were a backwall or interface echo. The Main Bang Blank indicates
the point in time where the gage begins to search for echoes.
In Modes 2 and 3, the setting of the Main Bang Blank is not critical; set at some point
between the end of excitation pulse ringdown and the interface echo.
In Mode 1, however, the length of the Main Bang Blank determines the minimum
thickness that can be measured, and it must be positioned with care after selecting the
NVM
Initial Gain level. In Mode 1, set just past the Initial Pulse. If the Main Bang Blank is too
short, then the gage hangs up on the excitation pulse and readings are not be possible. If the
Main Bang Blank is too long, then the minimum measurable thickness is unnecessarily
restricted. Make sure that the Main Bang Blank is always set before the interface echo
from the shortest water path when using immersion transducers.
In general, set the Main Bang Blank just beyond the point where the gage hangs up, and
test with the transducer both coupled to and uncoupled from the test material to ensure
accurate measurements.
Main Bang Blank
Initial Pulse
Figure 141 Main Bang Blank Position for Mode 1
Main Bang Blank
Initial Pulse
Figure 142 Main Bang Blank Position for Mode 2 and 3
11.10 Adjusting the Echo Window

The Echo Window is the time interval in each Main Bang period during which the gage is
enabled to detect Echoes. The Echo Window interval begins at the end of the Main Bang
Blank. The end of the Echo Window depends on the DtectMode and EchWindow
parameters as shown in the following table:
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NVN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
DtectMode = 1 DtectMode = 2 or 3
Echo Window Starts: At end of Main Bang At end of Main Blank

Blank
Echo Window Ends: EchWindow xµsec EchWindow xµsec
following Main Bang following the interface
blank
Note: xµsec where you set the x parameter.
Table 9 DtectMode and EchWindow Parameters
In Mode 1, the Echo Window can usually be set to any value greater than the round-trip
pulse transit time in the thickest or slowest piece of material to be measured. The exact
setting is not critical as long as it is long enough to include the farthest echo of interest. In
Modes 2 and 3, the Echo Window is limited to the time interval between successive
interface echoes. The end of the Echo Window must be set ahead of the second interface
echo to prevent an incorrect detection, which in turn determines a maximum measurable
thickness for Mode 2 and Mode 3 setups. In applications involving Mode 2 and Mode 3
immersion measurements, the echo placement must apply throughout the range of water
paths to be used.
Echo Window
Main Bang Blank

Initial Pulse
Backwall
Figure 143 Echo Window Setting for Mode 1
NVO
Echo Window
Interface Echo 2nd Interface

Echo
Interface Blank
Figure 144 Echo Window Setting for Mode 2 and 3
11.10.1 Echo 1 Detect and Echo 2 Detect

Echo 1 Detect and Echo 2 Detect select positive or negative polarity echo detection as
determined by application requirements. Selection is dependant on mode of
measurement and type of test material.
Note: Positive and negative polarity refer to processed echoes displayed on the
waveform display.
Mode 1: Using contact transducers, Echo 1 is the backwall echo and Echo 2 is
not applicable. Echo 1 is normally negative, except when measuring material
of low acoustic impedance bonded to a material of high impedance (such as
plastic or rubber over metal), where the echo is phase-reversed and positive
detection for Echo 1 is appropriate.
Mode 2: Using delay line or immersion transducers, Echo 1 is the interface

echo and Echo 2 is the backwall echo. Echo 1 is normally positive for high
impedance materials such as metals and ceramics, and negative for low
impedance materials such as most plastics. Echo 2 is normally negative unless
the backwall echo represents the sort of low-to-high impedance boundary
described above.
Mode 3: Using delay line or immersion transducers, Echo 1 is the interface

echo and Echo 2 represents the backwall echoes. Since Mode 3 generally
involves measurement of high impedance materials, the general rule is to set
Echo 1 positive and Echo 2 negative. In some special cases involving difficult
geometries, phase distortion may cause the positive side of the backwall echoes
to be better defined than the negative side; in such cases set Echo 2 positive.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NVP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Figure 145 Negative Detection Steel Back by Air
Echo 1 Detect
Positive
Echo 2 Detect
Negative
Figure 146 Positive Detection Plastic Bonded to Steel
11.10.2 Interface Blank

Use Interface Blank in Modes 2 and 3 only. Interface Blank represents a blank or dead
zone up to 20 microseconds in length that follows the leading edge of the interface echo.
In Mode 2, the Interface Blank prevents detection of trailing lobes or cycles of the
interface echo, which might otherwise be detected as backwall echoes, resulting in a hang-
up condition.
The Interface Blank should be set as short as possible to avoid unnecessarily restricting
minimum measurable thickness. The Initial Gain function often helps reduce interface
echo amplitude and permit use of a shorter interface blank. Check Interface Blank settings
with the transducer both coupled to and uncoupled from the test material.
In Mode 3, the Interface Blank selects which pair of backwall echoes are measured. In
most conditions, the Interface Blank would be set just short of the first backwall echo.
However, as a practical matter, the first backwall echo from thin materials is often
distorted or lost in the interface ringdown, and with some challenging geometries (such as
NVQ
tight radii) later pairs of backwall echoes may be cleaner than early ones. In these cases, set
the Interface Blank to a length that insures detection of a clean and well-defined pair of
backwall echoes, even if echoes are not the first two.
Gage Reading Trailing Edge of the Interface Echo Interface Blank Set Correctly
Figure 147 Mode 2
Gage Reading between Backwall 1 and 2 Interface Blank Adjusted so Gage will Measure
between Backwall 2 and 3
Figure 148 Mode 3
11.10.3 Mode 3 Echo Blank

The function of Mode 3 Echo Blank in Mode 3 is analogous to that of Interface Blank in
Mode 2 or Main Bang Blank in Mode 1. This function creates a blank or dead zone up to
20 microseconds long following the leading edge of the first detected backwall echo, to
prevent detection of trailing lobes or cycles of that echo and the resulting gage hang-up.
Because Mode 3 Echo Blank limits minimum measurable thickness, set the controls as
short as possible; typically no longer than a few hundred nanoseconds. Special cases may
be an exception where mode conversion effects on curved samples cause significant
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NVR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
spurious signals between legitimate echo peaks; in such cases set the Mode 3 Echo Blank
as long as necessary to prevent detection of the spurious signals.
Figure 149 Gage Hanging up on Trailing Edge of Backwall 1
Figure 150 M3Blank Set Properly
11.10.4 Setup Adjustment

To make setup adjustments, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [2] (SETUP ADJ) and the gage displays the first setup adjustment
parameter just below the waveform area of the display.
NVS
Figure 151 Adjusting the Setup Parameter
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to select which parameter to adjust.

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to change the value of the parameter.
11.10.5 Save Setup Parameters

Once the proper adjustments are made, you can store the settings for a quick and easy
recall. The Model 37DL PLUS can store up to 10 custom setups in its internal memory.
To save setup parameters, follow these steps:
1. Make the appropriate changes to the setup parameters.

2. Press [2nd F], [3] (RECALL SU). The Recall Setup Select screen opens.
Figure 152 Displaying Recall Setups
The changes that were made are located in the active setup.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NVT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
3. Press [SAVE] and the Recall Setup Save screen opens.
Figure 153 Saving Recall Setups
4. Press [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and numeric keys to enter a name for the Custom Setup.
Press [ENTER].
5. Press [ ] and [ ] to select a location to store the Custom Setup.
Setups named User-1 through User-10 are empty locations. Use caution when
selecting a location that already contains a custom setup because the new setup will
replace the old information.
6. Press [SAVE] to save the Custom Setup at the selected location. Pressing
[MEAS/RESET] the save function and returns to the Measurement mode.
NVU
j~å~ÖáåÖ=`çããìåáÅ~íáçåëLa~í~=qê~åëÑÉê
12 Managing Communications/Data
Transfer
This section describes how the Model 37DL PLUS can communicate with a computer or
printer in order to send or receive files.
• Transmitting Data to a Computer or Printer
• Receiving (Downloading) Files from a Computer
• Uploading/Downloading a Stored Transducer Setup to a Computer
• Setting Up Serial Communications
• Identifying Data Output Formats
• Performing Datalogger and Communication Resets
• Using the WIN37DL PLUS Interface Program
12.1 Transmitting Data to a Computer or Printer

This procedure is normally done after you take measurements from all desired locations.
Once data is transmitted from the Model 37DL PLUS it remains in memory for later use,
or until you clear the data. Therefore, if any errors occur while transmitting data it can be
sent again.
Before proceeding with any of the operations described in the sections below:
• Confirm that the receiving device is connected and configured properly. See the
following sections of this manual starting on page 205, page 241, and page 243. Also,
refer to the operators manuals for the receiving device and for the receiving software.
We recommend using the GE Panametrics WIN37DL PLUS Interface Program with
the gage to take advantage of all the datalogging features.
• Confirm that the communications parameters on the Model 37DL PLUS are set
identical to those on the computer or printer.
Note: The Model 37DL PLUS can send data to any device capable of receiving
ASCII formatted data using the RS-232C/D protocol. This includes personal
computers, minicomputers, dataloggers, and printers. The data cable must
be compatible with the Model 37DL PLUS output connector and the serial
input connector of the receiving device. GE Panametrics supplies cables for
IBM compatible PCs and serial printers and provide assistance with
connecting any other equipment. See Appendix D - Serial Interface on page
241.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` NVV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Note: When communicating directly to a printer the Model 37DL PLUS will only
work with serial printers.
12.1.1 Send Entire Files from Gage to Computer or Printer

You can send single or multiple files from the Model 37DL PLUS datalogger. Data that is
transmitted includes File Name, File Header, ID Numbers, Thickness Data, Flags,
Calibration Setups, and Comments.
To send entire files from the Model 37DL PLUS to a computer or printer, follow these
steps:
1. press [FILE] while in the Measurement mode. The File Options menu opens:
Figure 154 Selecting the Send Option from the File Menu
2. Press [ ] and [ ] until the Send option is highlighted. Press [ENTER]. The File Send
screen opens:
Figure 155 Selecting a File to Send
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to select the All or Selected option. Press [ENTER].
OMM
• Choosing All sends all of the files in the Model 37DL PLUS to the connected
device. If you choose All:
a. Send is highlighted.
b. Press [ENTER].
c. After confirming the send function, the Model 37DL PLUS begins transmitting
all files in the database.
• Choosing Selected lets you choose which specific files in the datalogger you want
to send to the connected device. If you choose Selected:
a. The first file in the list is highlighted.
b. Press [ENTER] to transmit the file. A check mark appears, tagging the file.
Press [ENTER] again to un-tag the file if you do not want to select it.
c. Press [ ] and [ ] until the next desired file name is highlighted.
d. Press [ENTER]. Continue this procedure until all desired files are tagged.
e. Press [2nd F], [ ] when finished to highlight Send.
f. Press [ENTER] to complete sending the tagged files.
12.1.2 Sending a Specific Range of ID Numbers from a Specific File

This feature is useful when you need to transmit only a portion of a given file to a computer
or printer.
To send a specific range of ID numbers from a specific file, follow these steps:
1. Open the file that contains the data to be transmitted, if the desired file is not already
the active file. See Opening a File on page 160.
2. Press and hold [SEND], from the Measurement mode, until the ID -Range Send
screen opens.
Figure 156 Identifying a Range of ID Numbers to Send
3. Use the gages editing functions to set the starting ID of the desired range of ID
numbers. Press [ENTER].
4. Use the gages editing functions to set the ending ID of the desired range of ID
numbers. Press [ENTER].
Send is highlighted.
5. Press [ENTER]. The gage transmits the specified range.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OMN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
12.1.3 Perform a Single Send of the Current Displayed Measurement Data to

a Computer or Printer
This procedure is used for transmitting the current displayed measurement data only with
its appropriate setup flags. The current ID number is not transmitted. This feature is useful
when the Model 37DL PLUS is continuously connected to an external device (printer,
data collector, computer) and you need to collect only data on command.
To perform a single send, follow these steps:
1. Setup the desired Measurement mode on the Model 37DL PLUS.

2. Make a thickness reading.
3. Press [SEND] quickly (release in less than one second).
Only the displayed measurement data with its appropriate setup flags is transmitted
and the gage will return to the original Measurement mode. The specific data
transmitted depends on the datalogger output format. Pressing [SEND] while the
thickness display is blank sends “—.—-” and the displayed flags.
Note: Sending a displayed reading will blank a held reading, reset the minimum or
maximum function, and release a frozen waveform.
12.1.4 Send a Snapshot from the Model 37DL PLUS to a Computer

With this function, you can send the entire Model 37DL PLUS display to the WIN37DL
PLUS Interface Program on a windows-based PC. This is useful when you need an exact
replica of the display for reporting or documentation purposes.
To send a snapshot of the Model 37DL PLUS display to a computer, follow these steps:
1. Setup the desired Measurement mode and waveform screen format on the Model
37DL PLUS.
2. Select Snap Shot from the WIN37DL PLUS Interface Program. See the WIN37DL
PLUS Instruction Manual (part number 910-249) for details.
3. Make a thickness reading or recall a reading from memory.
4. Press [2nd F], [SEND] (PRINT).
The displayed screen is transmitted to the computer.
12.1.5 Send a Snapshot from the Model 37DL PLUS to a Printer

With this function, you can send the entire Model 37DL PLUS display to a compatible
graphics printer. This feature is useful when an exact replica of the display is needed for
reporting or documentation purposes. This procedure describes how to save a snapshot of
the screen to a printer.
OMO
Note: Any waveform sent to a printer pressing [SEND] only, described from
page 200 to page 202, does not print as a graphic. Instead, the waveform data
prints in an encoded non-readable format.
To print waveforms on a printer, follow these steps:
1. Set up the desired Measurement mode and waveform screen format on the Model
37DL PLUS.
2. Verify that the Model 37DL PLUS is properly connected to the printer.
3. Make a thickness reading or recall a reading from memory.
4. Press [2nd F], [SEND] (PRINT).
The displayed screen is transmitted to the printer.
Note: A compatible portable printer is available from GE Panametrics (part

number 36PR.)
12.2 Receiving (Downloading) Files from a Computer

The same type of datalogger information, which you can send to a computer, can also be
received or downloaded from a computer into the gage. This has two benefits:
• Retrieve thickness survey data, previously saved with ID numbers and stored in a
computer file, to the gage months or years later at the next survey date. Use this
retrieved data for three purposes:
– Guides you through the measurement sequence using the ID numbers.
– Compare current values, at the measurement site, with previous thickness values.
– Use the previous survey setup data to manually or automatically verify that the
current measurement setup identical.
• Create ID number sequences in a computer and then download to the gage. This
externally created sequence can guide you through the prescribed measurement
location path. The ID sequence created in the computer must have setup information.
The setup can be the gage default setups or any other desired sequence of setups.
The data downloaded to the Model 37DL PLUS gage must be in the same precise
format in which data is transmitted. GE Panametrics recommends using the
WIN37DL PLUS Interface Program to handle all functions of interfacing, storing,
and creating Model 37DL PLUS data. Other database and editor software may work,
but depends on the software design functionality. Please contact GE Panametrics for
information on additional software data management programs.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OMP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
To Download a Data file to the Gage
1. Confirm that the transmitting device is connected and configured properly. (See
Communication Parameters on page 205 and See Appendix D - Serial Interface on
page 241.) Also refer to the operators manuals for the transmitting device and for
transmitting software.
2. Confirm that the communications parameters on the Model 37DL PLUS are identical
to those on the computer.
3. Power on the Model 37DL PLUS and make sure it is in the standard startup or
Measure screen.
4. Begin sending formatted data from the computer. The Model 37DL PLUS displays a
Receiving Data screen while the data is sent. This screen disappears after the Model
37DL PLUS is finished receiving data.
5. When all the transmitted data is received, the gage returns to the Measure screen.
Review the new gage database for accuracy.
12.3 Uploading/Downloading a Stored Transducer Setup

to a Computer
The Model 37DL PLUS can store up to 10 custom user defined Transducers Setups. Send
these Transducer Setups to the optional WIN37DL PLUS Interface Program, allowing
you to save a copy of all Transducer setups on the computer. You can also send these
Transducer Setups back to the Model 37DL PLUS. This feature is very useful to setup
multiple Model 37DL PLUS gages with the same Custom transducer setup.
12.4 Setting Up Serial Communications

The Model 37DL PLUS can transmit stored data and displayed readings over its I/O
(Input/Output) RS-232 cable to any device with an RS-232 serial interface connector. The
Model 37DL PLUS can also receive and execute commands sent from any device with a
serial interface. Such devices include personal computers and printers.
In order to enable the Model 37DL PLUS to communicate with another device, you must
use the correct cable and the same communication parameters must be set into the gage
and the other device. These topics are discussed in the next two sections.
12.4.1 RS-232 Cables

The Model 37DL PLUS must be connected to the computer with the proper cable. Since
all computers do not have the same serial port connector, the correct cable must be ordered
from GE Panametrics. One RS-232 cable is included with every Model 37DL PLUS,
which you can specify at the time of order.
GE Panametrics offers the following cables that are compatible with most computer and
printer serial connectors:
OMQ
I/O Cable Computer Serial Port Cable Typical

Part # Connector Description Length Device
36DLC/9F-6 “D” Type, 9 male (pin) 6 ft. (2M) IBM or compatible AT
contacts or PS2-30 computer
36DLC/25F-6 “D” Type, 25 male (pin) 6 ft. (2M) PC, PC-X, and PS-2
contacts type computers, some
serial printers
36DLC/25M-6 “D” Type, 25 female 6 ft. (2M) Other computers
(socket) contacts and
serial printers
36DLC/9M/PR-6 “D” Type, 25 female 6 ft. (2M) Portable Printer
Table 10 Computer or Printer Serial Port
Note: Even matching cables and connectors do not guarantee compatibility. To

verify that a particular device serial port connector is compatible with a
Model 37DL PLUS cable, compare the wiring information in Appendix C
with the serial port wiring information given in the operators manual for the
remote device. If there is a wiring compatibility problem, sometimes
software or hardware switches may be set to change the connections.
Otherwise, GE Panametrics may be able to supply a special cable for the
application.
12.4.2 Communication Parameters

The Model 37DL PLUS communication parameters must match the configuration of the
computer. These communication parameters off several communication output options
such as DBase Tracking, B-Scan Output, 36DLP Output, and Fisher Enable. The
following provides a brief description of these options:
• DBase Tracking: Allows the gage to automatically adjust certain setup parameters
such as matching each current ID setup in the current datalogger file.
• B-Scan Output: Allows the gage to accept B-Scan data by the gage when it responds
to a Filewrite remote command. Data is sent by the gage when it responds to a
Fileread remote command. Also, data is sent during a File Send operation following
waveform data for output formats that support waveform data.
• 36DLP Output: Allows the gage to produce a 36DLP FTP style output. If this option
is activated, files that do not have compatible data are filtered prior to transmission.
• Fisher Enable: Allows the gage to support the Fisher gage. When this option is
activated the following settings are locked to a set parameter: Baud Rate (9600),
Number of Stop Bits (1), Parity (None), and Communications Protocol (Multiple).
The Model 37DL PLUS is then set to receive and publish thickness readings received
from the Fisher gage. You can modify locked parameters after this feature is
deactivated.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OMR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
To set up the communication parameters, follow these steps:
1. Determine the settings used in the receiving device for the following:
Baud Rate: (19200, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200)
Stop Bits: (1 or 2)
Parity: (None, Odd, or Even)
Comm Protocol: (Multiple or Single)
Output Format: (F1, F2, F4, F5, F6, F7, F8, F9, F10)
DBase Tracking: (Off or On)
B-Scan Output: (Off or On)
36DLP Output: (Off or On)
Fisher Enable: (Off or On)
Figure 157 Selecting the Communication Option from the Setup Mode Menu
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Communication option. Press [ENTER]. The

Figure 158 Viewing Communication Parameters
The current communication parameters are displayed.

4. Press [ ] and [ ] to select any of the parameters until the desired parameter is
highlighted. Press [ ] or [ ] to change the setting of that parameter.
5. Highlight the Previous Screen option. Press [ENTER] to exit this mode, or press
[MEAS/RESET] to go directly back to the Measurement mode with the new
parameters set.
OMS
12.5 Identifying Data Output Formats

There are 9 available output formats for transmitted data. Output formats vary depending
whether you are using a dual element transducer or a single element transducer. A general
description of each is given in Table 11 and Table 12.
File ID Thickness Setup Note

Format Waveforms
Header Header Table Table Table
F-1 X X X X X X
F-2 X X X X X
F-4 X
F-5 X X X X X
F-6 X X X X
F-7 X X X X
F-8 X X X
F-9 X X X X X
F-10 X X X X
Table 11 Model 37DL PLUS Dual Element Transducer Output Formats
File ID Thickness Setup Appsetup Note

Format Header Header Table Waveforms Table Table Table
F-1 X X X X X X X
F-2 X X X X X
F-4 X
F-5 X X X X X
F-6 X X X X
F-7 X X X X
F-8 X X X
F-9 X X X X X X
F-10 X X X X
Table 12 Model 37DL PLUS Single Element Transducer Output Formats
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OMT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
To view the current format and/or change it, proceed as follows:

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Communication option. Press [ENTER]. The
Figure 159 Viewing the Communication Parameters
The current communication parameters are displayed. The settings for the current
output format is shown.
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to select the output format. Press [ ] or [ ] to change the setting.
4. Highlight the Previous Screen option. Press [ENTER] to exit this mode, or press
[MEAS/RESET] to go directly back to the Measurement mode with the new
parameters set.
12.6 Performing a Communication Reset

The Communication Reset function quickly resets the Model 37DL PLUS to factory
default settings. The default settings are as follows:
Baud Rate: 19200
Stop Bits: 1
Parity: None
Comm Protocol: Multiple
Output Format: F1
DBase Tracking: OFF
B-Scan Output: OFF
36DLP Output: OFF
Fisher Enable: OFF
To perform a Communication Reset, follow these steps:
208 Model 37DL PLUS

Figure 160 Selecting the Resets Option from the Setup Mode Menu
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Resets option. Press [ENTER]. The following
menu opens:
Figure 161 Selecting Communications Reset
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Communication Reset option. Press [ENTER].

The gage prompts you with a warning message.
Figure 162 Warning Prompt for Communication Reset

communication reset.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OMV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
If you want to cancel the operation without resetting the communication data, press
12.7 Using the WIN37DL PLUS Interface Program

WIN37DL PLUS is the Interface Program for the Model 37DL PLUS. WIN37DL PLUS
is a windows-based interface program, compatible with Windows 98, ME, 2000, NT, and
XP. This program provides the capability to create inspection database files, upload and
download data files, and generate reports. WIN37DL PLUS is compatible with Model
37DL PLUS and 36DL PLUS data files. The program offers advanced ODBC
compatibility and enhanced OLE features. For more details refer to the WIN37DL PLUS
Instruction Manual (part number 910-222), or contact GE Panametrics.
ONM
j~áåí~áåáåÖ=~åÇ=qêçìÄäÉëÜççíáåÖ=íÜÉ=jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
13 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the

Model 37DL PLUS
This section describes how to maintain your Model 37DL PLUS by applying routing care
and maintenance. Also, this section describes many troubleshooting ideas for common
problems you may encounter.
• Providing Routine Gage Maintenance
• Maintaining Transducers
• Understanding Error Messages
• Resolving Battery and Charger Problems
• Resolving Measurement Problems
• Performing Diagnostic Self Tests
• Getting Help
13.1 Providing Routine Gage Maintenance

The Model 37DL PLUS case is sealed to prevent intrusion of environmental liquids and
dust. However, it is not completely waterproof. Therefore, the unit should never be
immersed in any fluid. Use the rubber plug that comes with the unit to protect the I/O
connector and charger connector from contamination, particularly in areas where airborne
dust and aerosols are present. Use the protective pouch to provide shock and scratch
protection.
The Model 37DL PLUS case is designed to withstand normal field use. However, it is an
electronic instrument, and damage is possible if not handled with some care. Observe the
following instructions in particular:
• Never press a key with a hard or sharp object.
• When connecting cables to the gage, first align the connector with the mating
receptacle on the gage (the transducer connector pin is down, the RS-232 I/O cable
key tab facing up and the charger half-moon facing down), then carefully insert the
connector straight into the receptacle.
• When removing cables from the gage, first grasp the connector (not the cable), then
gently pull out from the gage.
• Do not throw or intentionally drop the gage.
• Do not use strong solvents or abrasives (clean the protective pouch, case keypad, and
display windows with a damp cloth and mild detergent, if necessary).
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` ONN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
13.2 Maintaining Transducers

The ultrasonic transducers or probes used with the Model 37DL PLUS are rugged devices
that need little care. They are not indestructible, however, and some attention to the
following items result in the longest life span.
• Make high temperature measurements only with designated high temperature
transducers. Surfaces hotter than approximately 125ºF/50ºC can damage or destroy
standard tranducers if contact is made.
• Cutting, pinching, or pulling the cables causes damage to the cables. Be careful to
prevent mechanical abuse to the cables. Never leave a transducer where a heavy object
can be placed on the cable. Never remove a transducer from the gage by pulling on the
cable; pull on the molded connector only. Never tie a knot in the transducer cable. Do
not twist or pull the cable at the point where it connects to the transducer.
• Excessive wear at the tip of the Transducer degrades its performance. To minimize
wear, do not scrape or drag the transducer across rough surfaces. Operating the
transducer may become erratic or impossible when a transducer tip becomes rough or
cracked. Although some wear is normal, severe wear limits transducer life. Take
particular care with delay line transducers, which have plastic delay lines; replace
delay lines when worn.
13.3 Understanding Error Messages

When operating the gage, certain error messages may appear. Usually these messages
indicate a problem with the operating procedure, but some may indicate a physical
problem with the gage itself. If you do not understand an error message, call GE
Panametrics for assistance.
13.4 Resolving Battery and Charger Problems

The battery life percent indicator in the lower right corner of the display shows the
percentage of operating time remaining. When the battery charge reaches about 2%, the
gage automatically powers off. If the gage powers off immediately after powering on, or
if it does not power on at all, then the battery is probably completely discharged.
If after recharging the battery (See Replacing the Battery Pack on page 31), the gage runs
only when the charger is connected, then you may need to replace the battery. Note, the
battery should last through several hundred discharge-recharge cycles before failing.
Remember that the battery charge indicator shows remaining operating time only when
the charger is not connected. Do not use the charge indicator to determine when a charging
battery has reached full charge. A battery must be charged 2 hours to completely restore
full capacity.
If the unit does not switch on even after the charger is connected for several minutes, then
either the gage itself or the charger requires service.
See page 30 to page 32 for more information.
ONO
13.5 Resolving Measurement Problems

Symptom:
No or low echoes, no measurement (LOS)
Possible Explanation:
• Insufficient couplant, especially on rough or curved surfaces
• Gain set too low
• Material is too attenuating or surfaces are not parallel or are too rough
• Gage requires service; first try Master Reset, do pulser/receiver test
Symptom:
Good echoes, no measurements
• Gage problem; perform hardware status in the Diagnostic Setup mode
Symptom:
Good echoes, incorrect measurements
• Not in calibration; perform calibration
• Differential mode - check Diff flag, press [2nd F] [9] (DIFF)
• Min or Max mode - see page 71 or page 73
• Material is too grainy, has flaws, inclusions or laminations, or very high surface noise;
try gain optimization, manual gain adjust or extended blank
13.6 Performing Diagnostic Self Tests

To aid in localizing a suspected hardware problem or simply to verify correct hardware
operation, several tests can be performed from the keypad.
• Keypad
• Video
• Hardware Status
• Error Status
To select any of the above diagnostics, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F] [0] (SETUP).

2. Press [ ] to highlight the Diagnostics option. Press [ENTER].
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` ONP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Diagnostic you want to perform. Press [ENTER].
13.6.1 Keypad Test

To perform a Keypad Test, follow these steps:
1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Keypad option. Press [ENTER]. A replica of the keypad
appears on the display.
2. Test any key by pressing it. If that specific key is working correctly, then the gage
beeps and that key is highlighted on the display.
Note: [ON/OFF] powers off the gage and [ENTER] exits the Keypad Test mode.
13.6.2 Video Display Test

To perform a Video Display Test, do the following:
Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Video option. Press [ENTER]. This test displays a
darkened rectangle, which decreases in size.
If at any time a break appears in the pattern, then there is a problem with the waveform
display. Otherwise, the video display is operating normally.
13.6.3 Hardware Status

The Model 37DL PLUS has several internal tests to report proper gage function. From the
P
Hardware Status screen, a represents a passed test; an X represents a failed test. If you
receive an X next to a test, please contact GE Panametrics for further diagnosis.
To view the hardware status, do the following:
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Hardware Status and the following screen opens:
Figure 163 Viewing the Hardware Status Screen
ONQ
Listed below are the test names with a brief description:

DC GAIN: Amplifier Test
BLANK CAL: Detector Calibration
SAMPLER CAL: Acquisition system calibration
Receiver 1:
THRESHOLD CAL: Detection level calibration
OFFSET1: Amplifier1 calibration
OFFSET2: Amplefier2 calibration
FLASH ADC OFFSET : Acquisition baseline calibration
Receiver 2:
THRESHOLD CAL: Detection level calibration
OFFSET1: Amplifier1 calibration
OFFSET2: Amplefier2 calibration
FLASH ADC OFFSET: Acquisition baseline calibration
+V1: Main Board voltage test
-V1: Main Board voltage test
BATTERY: Current battery level in volts
RAM BANK1: Memory test
TRANSDUCER: Current transducer in use
PROBE TX DELAY: Xdelay for transmit side
PROBE RX DELAY: Xdelay for receiver side.
13.6.4 Error Status

To view the Error Status, do the following:
Press [2nd F] [0] (SETUP) to select the Error Status option. This displays an error
log.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` ONR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
ONS
^ééÉåÇáñ=^=J=qÜÉçêó=çÑ=léÉê~íáçå
Appendix A - Theory of Operation

The GE Panametrics Model 37DL PLUS Ultrasonic Thickness Gage operates on the dual
transducer “pulse-echo” principal, timing the reflection of high frequency sound waves
from the far wall of the test piece. This technique, derived from sonar, has been widely
applied to nondestructive testing.
The gage uses a dual transducer with separate transmitting and receiving piezoelectric
elements or a single transducer with one transmitting and receiving piezoelectric element.
The frequency of these sound waves is far beyond the range of human hearing — typically
from two million to ten million cycles per second vs. a limit of about twenty thousand
cycles per second for the human ear. Sound at these frequencies does not travel well
through air, so a coupling liquid such as propylene glycol or glycerin or gel is used
between the transducer and test piece.
When using a dual transducer the transmit side generates an ultrasonic pulse when it is
excited by a short electrical pulse. The sound wave generated by the transmit side of the
transducer is coupled into the test piece, travels through it, and is reflected back from the
opposite side. See Dual Transducer Sound Paths when Measuring Material Thickness on
page 218. The reflected sound wave or echoes are coupled into the receive side of the
transducer where they are converted back into electrical signals. See Received Transducer
Waveform when Measuring a Material Thickness on page 218. The gage precisely
measures the time interval t between the excitation pulse and the first echo signal. It then
subtracts the time t x which is the time for the sound wave to travel from the transmit
element to the end of the transducer plus the time for the echo to travel from the end of
transducer to the receive element. Next “V-Path correction time” tv is computed and
subtracted. This tv compensates for the longer V-shaped path which the sound must travel
when measuring thin wall materials. The result is multiplied by the velocity of sound in the
test material, V, and divided by two to compensate for the two-way sound path. The final
result, X, is the thickness of the test material.
X = [(t-tx-tv )(V)]/ 2
When using a single transducer in the echo-to-echo mode, the crystal generates an
ultrasonic pulse when it is excited by a short electrical pulse. The sound wave generated by
the transducer is coupled into the test piece, travels through it, and is reflected back from
the opposite side (Figure 164 on page 218). Part of the reflected sound wave or echo is
coupled into the transducer where it is converted into an electrical signal while the
remaining part of the reflected sound wave reflects from the end of the transducer back
into the material where it is reflected a second time from the opposite side and returns into
the transducer. The gage precisely measures the time interval t between these two
reflected echoes.
A microprocessor controls all functional blocks of the gage as directed by the program
stored in the ROM (Read Only Memory). See Model 37DL PLUS Block Diagram on page
219. The microprocessor performs the arithmetic described above to produce the
thickness value. This value along with various gage status indicators is sent to the display.
The microprocessor also directs the Receiver/Detector to measure the transducer type
using the ID pin of the transducer. Calibration values, gage setups, as well as thickness
data is saved in non-volatile RAM (Random Access Memory).
An Analog to Digital Convertor (A/D) converts the amplified RF signal to a digitized form
that the microprocessor can process, store, and show on the graphics display. The
keyboard informs the microprocessor of user entered changes of mode, values, etc.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` ONT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Finally, the Serial RS-232 circuit receives and transmits data and commands between the
gage (microprocessor) and an external computer or printer.
Figure 164 Dual Transducer Sound Paths when Measuring Material Thickness
Figure 165 Received Transducer Waveform when Measuring a Material Thickness
ONU
Figure 166 Model 37DL PLUS Block Diagram
The Model 37DL PLUS can employ any of three measure modes to calculate pulse transit
time.
Mode 1: Use with contact transducers. In this mode, measurement is made from the initial
excitation pulse to the first returning echo from the backwall of the test piece. The “MTI”
marker indicates the Measured Time Interval.
Mode 2: Use with delay line and immersion transducers. In this mode, measurement is
made between an interface echo marking the time the sound wave enters the test piece and
the first backwall echo. The “MTI” marker indicates the Measured Time Interval.
Mode 3: Use with delay line and immersion transducers. In this mode, measurement is
made between two successive backwall echoes that follow an interface echo. The “MTI”
Marker indicates the Measured Time Interval.
If echoes are not detected during a given measurement period, the gage will shut down to
save power until a new measurement cycle is required. If echoes are detected, the timing
circuit will precisely measure an interval appropriate for the selected Measurement
mode, and then repeat this process a number of times to obtain a stable, averaged reading.
The microprocessor then uses this time interval measurement, along with sound velocity
and zero offset information stored in the Random Access Memory (RAM), to calculate
thickness. Finally, the thickness is shown on the LCD and updated at a selected rate.
Dual Element Transducer Measurements

The irregular surfaces that are frequently encountered in corrosion situations give duals an
advantage over single element transducers. All ultrasonic gaging involves timing the
round trip of a sound pulse in a test material. Because solid metal has an acoustic
impedance that differs significantly from that of gasses, liquids, or corrosion products
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` ONV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
such as scale or rust, the sound pulse will reflect from the far surface of the remaining
metal. The test instrument is programmed with the velocity of sound in the test material,
and computes the wall thickness from the simple formula:
Distance = Velocity x Time
Dual element transducers incorporate separate transmitting and receiving elements.
These elements are mounted on delay lines that are usually cut at an angle to the horizontal
plane (the roof angle), so that the transmitting and receiving beam paths cross beneath the
surface of the test piece. This crossed-beam design of duals provides a pseudo-focusing
effect that optimizes measurement of minimum wall thickness in corrosion applications.
Duals will be more sensitive than single element transducers to echoes from the base of
pits that represent minimum remaining wall thickness. Also, duals may often be used
more effectively on rough outside surfaces. Couplant trapped in pockets on rough sound
entry surfaces can produce long, ringing surface echoes that interfere with the near surface
resolution of single element transducers. With a dual, the receiver element is unlikely to
pick up this false echo. Finally, duals may be designed for high temperature
measurements that would damage single element contact transducers.
Factors Affecting Performance and Accuracy

• Surface Condition - Loose or flaking scale, rust, corrosion or dirt on the outside
surface of a test piece will interfere with the coupling of sound energy from the
transducer into the test material. Thus, any loose debris of this sort should be cleaned
from the specimen with a wire brush or file before measurements are attempted.
Generally it is possible to make corrosion measurements through thin layers of rust, as
long as the rust is smooth and well bonded to the metal below. Some very rough cast
or corroded surfaces may have to be filed or sanded smooth in order to insure proper
sound coupling. It may also be necessary to remove paint if it is flaking off the metal.
While it is often possible to make conventional corrosion measurements through thin
coats of paint (on the order of a few thousandths of an inch or 0.1 - 0.2mm), thicker
paint may attenuate signals or possibly create false echoes, causing inaccurate
measurements. Use of the echo-to-echo mode is recommended in such situations.
(See Using the Echo-to-Echo Mode on page 109).
Severe pitting on the outside surface of a pipe or tank can be a problem. On some
rough surfaces, the use of a gel or grease rather than a liquid couplant will help
transmit sound energy into the test piece. In extreme cases it will be necessary to file
or grind the surface sufficiently flat to permit contact with the face of the transducer.
In applications where deep pitting occurs on the outside of a pipe or tank it is usually
necessary to measure remaining metal thickness from the base of the pits to the inside
wall. There are sophisticated ultrasonic techniques utilizing focused immersion
transducers that can measure directly from the base of the pit to the inside wall, but this
is generally not practical for field work. The conventional technique is to measure
unpitted metal thickness ultrasonically, measure pit depth mechanically, and subtract
the pit depth from the measured wall thickness. Alternately, one can file or grind the
surface down to the base of the pits and measure normally.
As with any difficult application, experimentation with actual material samples is the
best way to determine the limits of a particular gage/transducer combination on a
given surface.
OOM
• Transducer Positioning/Alignment - For proper sound coupling the transducer

must be pressed firmly against the test surface. On small diameter cylindrical surfaces
such as pipes, hold the transducer so that the sound barrier material visible on the
probe face is aligned perpendicular to the center axis of the pipe. Figure 167 on
page 221.
PIPE
PROBE
Figure 167 Positioning the Transducer on Test Material
While firm hand pressure on the transducer is necessary for good readings, the probe
should never be scraped along or twisted against a rough metal surface. This will
scratch the face of the transducer and eventually degrade performance. The
recommended technique for moving a transducer along a rough surface is to pick it up
and reposition it for each measurement, not to slide it along.
Remember that an ultrasonic test measures thickness at only one point within the
beam of the transducer, and that in corrosion situations wall thicknesses often vary
considerably. Test procedures usually call for making a number of measurements
within a defined area and establishing a minimum and/or average thickness. Ideally,
data should be taken at increments no greater than half the diameter of the transducer,
to insure that no pits or other local variations in wall thickness are missed. It is up to the
user to define a pattern of data collection appropriate to the needs of a given
application.
It is possible that on some severely corroded or pitted materials there will be spots
where readings cannot be obtained. This can happen when the inside surface of the
material is so irregular that the sound energy is scattered rather than being reflected
back to the transducer. The lack of a reading may also indicate a thickness outside the
range of the transducer and instrument being used. Generally, an inability to obtain a
valid thickness reading at a particular point on a test specimen could be a sign of a
seriously degraded wall which may warrant investigation by other means.
• Calibration - The accuracy of measurements are only as good as the accuracy and
care with which the gage has been calibrated. There are no internal calibration
adjustments in the 37DL PLUS. However, it is essential that the velocity and zero
calibrations are performed whenever the test material or transducer is changed. See
Material Velocity and Zero Calibration on page 36. Periodic checks with samples of
known thicknesses are recommended to verify that the gage is operating properly.
• Taper or Eccentricity - If the contact surface and the back surface are tapered or
eccentric with respect to each other, the return echo again becomes distorted and the
accuracy of measurement is diminished. In cases of severe taper or eccentricity, it may
be impossible to obtain a usable echo.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OON
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
• Acoustic Properties of the Material - There are several conditions found in

engineering materials that can severely limit the accuracy and thickness range that can
be measured.
– Sound Scattering - In some materials, notably certain types of cast stainless steel,
cast irons, and composites, the sound energy is scattered from individual
crystallites in the casting or from dissimilar materials within the composite. This
effect reduces the ability to discriminate a valid return echo from the back side of
the material and limits the ability to gauge the material ultrasonically. It can
sometimes be overcome by using the Manual Gain Adjust (See Setting the
Manual Gain Adjust with a D79X Series and E110, EMAT Transducers on page
105), Automatic Gain Optimization (See Using Automatic Gain Optimization on
page 106) or Extended Blank (See Adjusting the Extended Blank with D79X
Series Transducers on page 108) features of the gage.
– Velocity Variations - A number of materials exhibit significant variations in
sound velocity from point-to-point within the material. Certain types of cast
stainless steels and brass exhibit this effect due to a relatively large grain size and
the anisotropy of sound velocity with respect to grain orientation. Other materials
show a rapid change in sound velocity with temperature. This is characteristic of
plastic materials where temperature must be controlled in order to obtain
maximum precision in the measurement.
– Sound Attenuation or Absorption - In many organic materials, such as low
density plastics and rubber, sound is attenuated very rapidly at the frequencies
used in normal ultrasonic thickness gauging. Therefore, the maximum thickness
that can be measured in these materials is often limited by sound attenuation.
• Phase Reversal or Phase Distortion: The phase or polarity of a returning echo is
determined by the relative acoustic impedances (density x velocity) of the boundary
materials. The gage assumes the customary situation where the test piece is backed by
air or a liquid, both of which have lower acoustic impedances than metals, ceramics,
or plastics. However, in some specialized cases (such as measurement of glass or
plastic liners over metal, or copper cladding over steel) this impedance relationship is
reversed, and the echo appears phase reversed. In these cases, it is necessary to change
the appropriate Echo Detection polarity in order to maintain accuracy. See Set Up and
Calibration with Single Element Transducers on page 49.
Material backed by air or

water. Use Default Echo
Detect, NEG.
Figure 168 Usual Case
OOO
Plastic or glass backed by

metal. Change Echo
Detect to POS.
Figure 169 Special Case
A more complex situation can occur in anisotropic or inhomogeneous materials such

as coarse-grain metal castings or certain composites, where material conditions result
in the existence of multiple sound paths within the beam area. In these cases, phase
distortion can create an echo that is neither cleanly positive nor negative. Careful
experimentation with reference standards is necessary, in these cases, to determine
effects on measurement accuracy.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OOP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
OOQ
^ééÉåÇáñ=_=J=qÉÅÜåáÅ~ä=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë
Appendix B - Technical Specifications
Packaging
Case Material High impact Lexan.
Size 9.2 H x 5.0 W x 1.5 T inch.

234 H x 1278 W x 38 T mm.
Weight 2.1 lbs.
Connectors Transducer: Two size “0” on 0.54 inch (13.7mm)

centers plus socket for 0.080" (2.03mm) pin. All
environmentally sealed RS-232: Sealed 6-pin
Lemo style.
Charger: Sealed 4-pin Lemo style.
Hand Strap Soft leather with adjustable velcro closure.
Temperature Operating: -5° F TO 112° F (-10° C to +50° C).
Case Splash proof.
Power
Battery Internal rechargeable NiCad battery pack. Rated at

6V @ 1800 mAHr or Disposable Alkaline 6 “AA”
cell.
Operating Time Per 25 hours minimum in normal Measurement mode

Charge with backlight off. 8 hours minimum with
backlight on.
Charger External wall plug-in charger for Universal

Supply (100VAC, 115VAC, and 230VAC) input.
Charge time 2 Hours.
Keyboard Sealed and embossed membrane surface.

Tactile and audible feedback.
Color coded graphics.
30 keys of 5 rows and 6 columns.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OOR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Display
Physical Graphics super twisted nematic liquid crystal

display.
Module Size: 114mm (W) x 100mm (H) x 14mm
(T).
Viewing area: 102mm (W) x 86mm (H).
Dots: 240 (W) x 200 (H).
Dot Size: 0.36mm x 0.36mm.
Color: Dark blue image on natural
background.
Backlight Electroluminescent backlight for viewing in low

ambient light condition. User selectable on or off.
Information A-Scan echo waveform with graticule of

Displayed amplitude vs. thickness axis.
Waveform area: 200 (W) x 94 (H) dots.

Waveform Status Flags:
F: Frozen
H: Held
Z: Zoomed
M: from datalogger memory
File name, ID number, stored value, and setup

stored at ID numbers.
Stored data flags.
OOS
Box # Flag Measurement

LOS
Box 1: M Standard Measurement L

L Standard LOS
E AE to E Measurement
l AE to E LOS
e ME to E Measurement
n ME to E LOS
1 Mode 1 Measurement
a Mode 1 LOS
b Mode 2 LOS
c Mode 3 LOS
Box 2: D Differential Absolute (Diff Mode)
d Differential Percentage (Diff Mode)
A Alarm Standard (Standard Alarm)
H High Alarm Standard (Standard Alarm)
L Low Alarm Standard (Standard Alarm)
- No Alarm/Diff (Standard Alarm)
p Previous Thickness Percent Alarms (Percent
Previous Mode)
r Previous Thickness Percent Low Alarm (Percent
Previous Mode)
g Previous Thickness Percent High Alarm (Percent
Previous Mode)
a Previous Thickness Absolute Alarm (Absolute
Previous Alarm Mode)
l Previous Thickness Absolute Low Alarm (Absolute
h Previous Thickness Absolute High Alarm (Absolute
Table 13 Information Displayed on the Model 37DL PLUS Screen
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OOT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Box # Flag Measurement

LOS
Box 3: m Min
M Max
Box 4: G Gain Modified
Table 13 Information Displayed on the Model 37DL PLUS Screen (Continued)
Measurement
Performance Pitch and catch using dual element
transducers.
Mode DE-STD: Time interval measurement from
the main excitation pulse to the first
detected echo.
DE-A E to E/DE-M E to E: Time between a

pair of backwall echoes using dual element
transducers.
SE-M1 (Mode 1): Time interval

measurement from the main excitation
pulse to the first detected echo.
SE-M2 (Mode 2): Time interval

measurement from the interface echo to the
first backwall echo.
SE-M3 (Mode 3): Time interval between

multiple backwall echoes with single
element transducers.
V-Path Automatic, dependent on GE Panametrics
Correction transducer type.
Thickness 0.020" - 20.00"
Range 0.5mm - 508.0mm
Measurement Selectable from the keypad
Resolution LOW: 0.01". 0.1mm
STD: 0.001" 0.01mm
Measurement Selectable from the keypad:
Display Update Norm: 4 measurements per second
Rate Fast: Approximately 20 measurements per
second
Material 0.0300"/µsec to 0.5511"/µsec.
Velocity Range 0.762mm/µsec to 13.999mm/µsec.
OOU
Material .0001"/µsec or .001mm/µsec.

Velocity
Resolution
Zero Cal Range 2500 to 6000 (auto detected).
Differential Ref. 0.0" to 25.00" (0.00mm - 635.00mm).
Range
Differential Ref. Same as current gage resolution.
Resolution
Alarm Setpoints 0.0" to 25.00" (0.00mm - 635.00mm).
Range
Alarm Setpoints Same as current gage resolution.
Resolution
Datalogger
Information • ID number
Stored • Thickness value
• Unit
• LOS/Measurement condition
• Differential mode, Differential
Reference value
• Alarm mode, Low and Hi alarm
reference values
• Minimum/Maximum reading
• Gain mode, Gain value
• Velocity value
• Transducer type
• Waveform image (A-Scan, if selected)
• Comments
• Source: Downloaded or stored
Storage Storage capacity of the gage is 60,000
Capacity thickness readings or 4,500 waveforms with
thickness readings.
ID# Size: 1 to 20 characters
Number Character Set: 0 thru 9, A thru Z, * # : , / . -
space
Database DOS compatible file structure:
Structure File Name: 32 characters, DOS compatible.
Number Of Files: Limited by available
memory.
Size Of File: Limited by available memory.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OOV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
File Creator Incremental

(Matrix Maker) Sequential (Defined by Starting and Ending
ID number)
Sequential with custom points
2-D Grid
2-D Grid with custom points
3-D Grid
Boiler
File Utilities Open
Create
Copy
Delete
Send
Edit-Rename
Note-Copy
Reports:
File summary with Statistics
Min/Max Summary
File comparisons
Alarm report
File Output F-1, F-2, F-4, F-5, F-6, F-7, F-8, F-9, and
Formats for Dual F-10 include File Header, ID Header,
Element Thickness Table, Waveforms, Setup Table,
Transducers and Note Table.
File Output F-1, F-2, F-4, F-5, F-6, F-7, F-8, F-9, and
Formats for F-10 include File Header, ID Header,
Single Element Thickness Table, Waveforms, Setup Table,
Transducers Appsetup Table, and Note Table.
Features • Erase any portion of the file or the entire
file.
• Print reading and waveform (EPSON
graphics).
• Send reading in different format.
• Insert and/or append ID numbers.
• Save reading at ID number.
• Review stored contents of datalogger.
• Erase any portion of the file or the entire
file.
• Print reading and waveform (EPSON
graphics).
• Send reading in different format.
Insert and/or append ID numbers.
OPM
Communication Baud: 19200, 9600, 4800,

2400, 1200
Stop Bits: 1 or 2
Parity: None, Even, or Odd,
Comm Protocol: Multiple or Single.
Output Format: F1, F2, F4, F5, F6, F7,
F8, F9, F10
DBase Tracking: Off/On
B-Scan Output: Off/On
36DLP Output: Off/On
Fisher Enable: Off/On
Agency CE.
Approval
Functions
Units The measurement units are keypad
selectable as either inches or millimeters.
Resolution The measurement resolution is selectable
among standard and low resolution from the
keypad:
Standard: 0.001" (0.01mm)
Low: 0.01" (0.1mm)
Echo Detection Standard Dual Element: Time between
Methods excitation pulse and first backwall echo
using dual element transducer.
Dual Echo-to-Echo: Time between

successive backwall echoes using dual
element transducers.
Thru-Coat: Time between excitation pulse

and first backwall while ignoring or
displaying a coating thickness.
Mode 1: Time between excitation pulse and

first echo following blank period using
contact transducers.
Mode 2: Time between the interface echo

and the first backwall echo. Normally used
with delay line or immersion transducers.
Mode 3: Time between a pair of backwall

echoes following the interface echo.
Normally used with delay line or immersion
transducers.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OPN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Min Mode Current thickness is displayed during

transducer contact and the minimum
thickness measured is displayed during
LOS.
Max Mode Current thickness is displayed during
transducer contact and the maximum
thickness measured is displayed during
LOS.
Hold/blank The thickness display during LOS may be
set to either HOLD the last reading during
LOS or BLANK the display during LOS.
Differential The thickness display may be set to display
either actual measured thickness or the
difference between the measured thickness
and a user-set “Differential Thickness
Reference Value”. The default is a Diff. Ref.
Value of 0.000 and Diff Measure mode
OFF.
Alarm The gage may be set to indicate visually and
audibly whenever the measured thickness is
less than a user-set Low Alarm value or
greater than a user-set High Alarm
value.The default is Low Alarm value =
0.000, High Alarm value = full scale, and
Alarm Measure mode OFF.
Calibration
View and/or set the material velocity by pressing [VEL] from the
Measurement mode, or by selecting MatlVel from the Setup Parameter List.
View and/or set the Zero Calibration by pressing [ZERO] from the
Measurement mode, or by selecting Zero from the Setup Parameter List.
Preform the Velocity and/or Zero Calibration by entering the known
thickness(es) of test block(s) while measuring the block(s).
Application Setups
Application Setups are a set of stored single transducer configurations of the
gage parameters for various measurement applications. Setups are optimized
for such application features as material, thickness range, and required
accuracy or resolution.
When the gage is turned on, the last Setup used is automatically selected and
the gage is ready to make similar measurements.
If the application has changed, choose an Application Setup name based on the
new application (refer to Table 14 on page 233).
OPO
Note: A transducer of the type specified for the selected setup should be plugged
into the gage.
Setup Name Probe Type Typical Application
DEFM1-20.0/M116 M116 Steel: 0.020 - 1.5" (0.250 - 38mm)

DEFM1-10.0/M112 M112 Steel: 0.030 - 10.000" (0.76 - 250mm)
DEFM1-5.0/M110 M110 Steel: 0.040 - 15" (1.00 - 380mm)
DEFM1-5.0/M109 M109 Steel: 0.050 - 25" (1.00 - 635mm)
DEFM1-2.25/M106 M106 Steel: 0.080 - 20" (2.00 - 500mm)
DEFM1-2.25/M1036 M1036 Steel: 0.080 - 25.00" (2.0 - 635mm)
DEFM2-15.0/V260 V260 Steel: 0.020 - 0.500" (0.5 - 12.5mm)
DEFM3-15.0/V260 V260 Steel: 0.010 - 0.25" (0.25 - 6mm)
DEFM2-20.0/M208 M208 Steel: 0.020 - 0.2" (0.5 - 10mm)
DEFM3-20.0/M208 M208 Steel: 0.008 - 0.200" (0.25 - 5mm)
DEFM2-10.0/M202 M202 Steel: 0.030 - 0.5" (0.75 - 12mm)
DEFM3-10.0/M202 M202 Steel: 0.010 - 0.50" (0.25 - 12mm)
DEFM2 - 5.0/M201 M201 Steel: 0.050 - 1.0" (1.5 - 25.4mm)
DEFM3 - 5.0/M201 M201 Steel: 0.030 - 0.50" (0.75 - 12.5mm)
DEFM2-5.0/M206 M206 Steel 0.050 - 0.75" (1.25 - 19mm)
DEFM2-2.25/M207 M207 Steel 0.080 - 0.75" (2 - 19mm)
DEFM3-2.25 /M207 M207 Steel 0.060 - 0.5" (1.5 - 6mm)
Note: The maximum thickness measuring capability on plastics depends on the attenuation
characteristics of the material.
Table 14 Setup Name and Application
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OPP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Setup Quantity 16 factory default setups. Space for 10 custom defined

setups.
Custom Application Setups Applications that are not covered by any of the default
setups can be measured by creating a custom setup for
the special application. This setup may be done by
adjusting the parameters of the closest default setup.
A description of the setup parameters, which can be

adjusted to make a custom setup are listed in Table 15
on page 234.
Name Description Units/Resolutions/Range
Mode Echo Detect Mode Standard Dual, Dual E to E, Thru-

Coat, Mode 1, Mode 2, and Mode
3.
Setup Name
Meastype Special measurement modes Standard or Oxide
ProbeType Transducer types Dual Element, Direct Contact,
Delay Line, Immersion, and
EMAT.
PulserPwr Pulser power 30, 60, or 110 Volts.
MaxGain Maximum receiver gain 0 - 79.6dB, 1dB steps.
InitGain Initial TVD gain 0 - MaxGain, 1dB steps.
TDGSlope Time Gain slope (default 0 - 26.5dB/s, 0.1dB/s steps.
MBBlank Main Bang Blank 57ns to 225µs, 0.14s steps. 22ns or
Echo Window time interval,
whichever is less.
EchWindow Echo window. Echo detect 55ns to 224.71µs. 55ns or MB
gate which begins at end of Blank time interval, whichever is
MB Blank in Mode 1 or less.
interface echo in Modes 2 &
3. The value reported for the
end of echo window is relative
to the Main Bang.
Echo1Detect Detection polarity of first + or -
echo
Table 15 Setup Parameter Description
OPQ
Name Description Units/Resolutions/Range
Echo2Detect Detection polarity of second + or -

echo
IFBLANK Blank after interface echo 0 - 20000 ns.
M3Blnk Blank after first measured 0 - 20000 ns.
backwall echo in Mode 3
MatlVel Ultrasonic sound velocity of 0.02000 - 0.66929"/s (0.5080 -
material to be measured 17.0000mm/s).
Zero Zero calibration factor 0 - 999.99.
Table 15 Setup Parameter Description (Continued)
General
Display Dot matrix, graphics, Super Twisted Nematic, monochrome,

transflective, liquid crystal display.
Viewable area is 2.22" x 1.51" (56.28mm x 38.36mm).

Electroluminescent backlight. Contrast is adjustable from the
keypad.
Keypad Sealed and embossed membrane surface. Tactile and audible
feedback color-coded graphics 30 keys.
Dual Element Automatically identifies the GE Panametrics transducer type
Transducers and optimizes the gage for that transducer. Non-GE
Panametrics transducers may work, but performance is not
guaranteed.
Following transducers will be supported: D790, D790-SM,

D791, D791-RM, D792, D793, D794, D795, D797, D798,
D7906-SM, D7908, D799, M201, MTD705
Single Element Can be used with 2.25MHz contact, delay line, and immersion
Transducers transducers from 2MHz to 30MHz.
Physical Size: 9.375" x 5.45" x 1.5
(238mm x 138mm x 38mm)
Weight: 2.1 lb. (0.951 kg)
Case: Material is Lexan
Construction: Dust and splash proof
Operating Temperature: 0oC to 50°C
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OPR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Battery and Charger
Battery Description 6V Rechargeable NiCad pack or field-replaceable alkaline

AA batteries.
Battery Run Time 25 hours typical in Mode 1with 4Hz update rate and
backlight turned off.
Battery Charge Time 2 hours (using 36CAPLUS).
Charger 36CAPLUS charger/AC adapter unit (will not recharge
alkaline batteries).
Optional Operation with six disposable alkaline “AA” cell is
available as a factory installed option. 70 hours typical run
time.
Special Gage Functions
General Access many gage functions, which do not require frequent

changing, by using the Special or Setup keypad mode.
Access all these features by pressing [2nd F], [0] (SETUP).
Press [ ], [ ], and [ENTER] to select a category of SP
functions (Measurement, B-Scan/DB Grid, Avg/Min
Measure, Temp Compensation, Communication,
Diagnostics, Resets, Clock). Finally select a particular
function to modify by pressing [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ], and
[ENTER].
List Of Special Measurement:
Functions Beeper (on* or off)
Inactive time (on* or off)
Language (English*, Spanish, German, French)
Radix (period* or comma)
Units (English* or metric)
Resolution (Standard* or low)
Hold/Blank (Blank* or hold)
Rectification (RF, Full*, Neg, Pos)
Waveform (unfill* or fill)
Backlight mode (normal* or auto)
Supv lock (off* or on)
Save key (thk* or thk & wf)
ID overwrite (off* or on)
* indicates the parameter default
OPS
B-Scan/DB Grid:
B-Scan:
B-Scan Size Mode (half or full)
B-Scan Direction (left to right, right to left)
B-Scan LOS OPT (stop or continue)
B-Scan Freeze OPT (show min, show max, show current)
B-Scan freeze review (on or off)
B-Scan MAX THK OPT (A-Scan range or specified THK)
DB Grid :
grid size (half or full)
reverse grid rows (on or off)
reverse grid columns (on or off)
transpose grid (on or off)
linearize rows and columns (on or off)
data cell flag (none, min/max, alarm, A-Scan)
Avg/Min Measure:
Enable (on or off)
Mode (avg or min)
# of Readings (2, 3, 4)
Temp Compensation:
Enable (on or off)
Mode (manual or auto)
Degree units (fahrenheit or celsius)
Calibration temp (variable)
Temp coef (variable)
Current temp (variable)
Communication:
Baud: (1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200*)
Stop Bits: (1* or 2)
Parity: (Even, Odd, or None*)
Comm Protocol: (multiple* or single)
Output Format for Single Element Transducer:
(F1*, F2, F4, F5, F6, F7, F8, F9, F10)
Output Format for Dual Element Transducer:
(F1*, F2, F4, F5, F6, F7, F8, F9, F10)
DBase Tracking: (On/Off*)
B-Scan Output: (On/Off*)
36DLP Output: (On/Off*)
Fisher Enable: (On/Off*)
* indicates the parameter default
Diagnostic:
Keypad
Video
Hardware status
Error status
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OPT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
RESETS
Measure Reset: (default values)
Std. resolution
4Hz Measure rate
Diff. value 0.000
Diff mode OFF
Display blank
Inactive time on
Alarm off
Low alarm 0.000
High alarm 25.00
Min off
Max off
Backlight off
Communication Reset: (default values)
Baud: 19200
Stop bit: 1
Parity: none
Comm protocol: multiple
Output format: F1
DBase Tracking: Off
B-Scan Output: Off
36DLP Output: Off
Fisher Enable: Off
Dbase Reset:
This reset function clears the entire database. Use
CAUTION: this function will erase all stored data, which
cannot be recalled.
Master Reset:
Performs all Measurement, Communications and Dbase
resets simultaneously.
OPU
^ééÉåÇáñ=`=J=pçìåÇ=sÉäçÅáíáÉë
Appendix C - Sound Velocities

The following table consists of the ultrasonic velocity in a variety of common materials.
Use this table only as a guide. The actual velocity in these materials may vary significantly
due to a variety of causes, such as, composition, preferred crystallographic orientation,
porosity, and temperature. Therefore, for maximum accuracy, establish the sound
velocity in a given material by first testing a sample of the material.
Material V (in./usec) V (mm/usec) Ref

Alumina, Al203 99.5% 0.4013 10.19 2
Aluminum, rolled 0.253 6.420 1

Aluminum,6061T6 0.251 6.383 2
Beryllium 0.5073 12.89 1
Brass, yellow 70 Cu, 30 Zn 0.1850 4.700 1
Brass, yellow 70 Cu, 30 Zn 0.1726 4.385 2
Copper, rolled 0.1972 5.010 1
Duraluminum, 17S 0.2487 6.320 1
Fused Silica 0.2349 5.968 1
Fused Silica 0.2335 5.932 2
Glass, crown 0.2008 5.100 5
Glass, flint 0.1567 3.980 5
Glass, pyrex 0.2220 5.640 1
Iron, Armco 0.2345 5.960 1
Lead, rolled 0.0771 1.960 1
Lucite 0.1055 2.680 1
Magnesium, drawn annealed 0.2270 5.770 1
Molybdenum 0.247 6.25 3
Monel 0.2105 5.350 1
Nickel 0.2377 6.040 1
Nylon 0.1031 2.735 2
Polyethylene 0.0705 1.950 1
Table 16 Sound Velocities of Various Materials (Longitudinal Wave Velocity)
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OPV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Material V (in./usec) V (mm/usec) Ref

Polystyrene 0.0925 2.350 1
Silicone Rubber RTV 0.0373 0.948 4
Steel, low alloy 0.2259 5.734 2
Steel, mild 0.2346 5.960 5
Steel, 1% C 0.2339 5.940 5
Steel, 1% C, hardened 0.2305 5.854 5
Stainless Steel #347 0.2278 5.790 1
Titanium 0.237 5.99 3
Tungsten, drawn 0.2129 5.410 1
Uranium 0.133 3.37 3
Water 0.0590 1.498 5
Zinc, rolled 0.1657 4.210 1
Zinc, extruded 0.1756 4.460 2
Table 16 Sound Velocities of Various Materials (Longitudinal Wave Velocity)
(Continued)
References
Folds, D. L. “Experimental Determination of Ultrasonic Wave Velocities in Plastics,
Elastomers, and Syntactic Foam as a Function of Temperature,” Naval Research and
Development Laboratory, Panama City, Florida, 1971.
Fredericks, J. R. Ultrasonic Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1965.
“Handbook of Chemistry and Physics” Chemical Rubber Co., Cleveland, Ohio, 1963.
Mason, W. P. Physical Acoustics and the Properties of Solids, D.Van Nostrand Co., New
York, 1958.
Papadakis, E. P. Panametrics - unpublished notes, 1972.
OQM
^ééÉåÇáñ=a=J=pÉêá~ä=fåíÉêÑ~ÅÉ
Appendix D - Serial Interface

Mechanical Description
The Input-Output (I/O) connector, a 6 position circular LEMO style receptacle, is located
in the center of the top of the Model 37DL PLUS. The mating connector inserts into the
I/O connector with the red dot upward and pushed straight in until it snaps into place. To
withdraw, pull the collet to release the latch and pull straight out.
GE Panametrics provides cables to connect the Model 37DL PLUS to devices with
standard DB-25 male and female connectors and also the IBM PC-AT 9 male pin serial I/
O connector. Use the information in Table 17 on page 241 as a reference to verify
particular equipment compatibility with the Model 37DL PLUS, and as an aid in
constructing a custom cable if necessary.
Model 37DL
IBM PC-AT STD DB25
PLUS I/O Wire Name Signal Name
Connector Pin #
Connector
1 Foil/tinned Ground 5 7
copper
2 Red Data from Gage 2 3
3 Orange Data to Gage 3 2
4 Yellow Do not connect – –
5 Green DTR from Gage 6 6
6 Blue DSR to Gage 4 20
Table 17 Equipment Compatibility
GE Panametrics
Length Length
Cable Connector
(Feet) (Meters)
Stock No. Part No.
704-689-01 36DLC/9F-6 6 2 IBM PC-AT (9 Pin Female)

704-690-01 36DLC/25M-6 6 2 25 Pin Male “D”
704-691-01 36DLC/25F-6 6 2 25 Pin Female “D” (PC/XT)
704-689-02 36DLC/9F-12 12 4 IBM PC-AT (9 Pin Female)
704-690-02 36DLC/25M- 12 4 25 Pin Male “D”
12
704-691-02 36DLC/25F- 12 4 25 Pin Female “D” (PC/XT)
12
Table 18 Standard 37DL PLUS I/O Cables
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OQN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
GE Panametrics
Length Length Cable Connector
(Feet) (Meters)
Stock No. Part No.
704-718-06 36DLC/9M/ 6 2 9 Pin Male “D” (Portable

PR-6 Printer)
Table 18 Standard 37DL PLUS I/O Cables (Continued)
Note: Custom cables with a user specified terminal connector may be ordered from
GE Panametrics.
Electrical Definition and Data Format

Data is transmitted on one line (data out of gage) and received on another line (data into
gage). Transfer is asynchronous serial. Baud rate, word length, stop bits and parity are
selectable from the keyboard. Data consists of ASCII coded character strings.
Signal levels are RS-232 C/D compatible. Mark is less than -2.5 volts. Space is greater
than +2.5V. The maximum output signal range is ±5.50 volts. The maximum input signal
range is ± 20 volts.
The following two hardware handshake lines are included:
DTR: The gage sets DTR low (<-2.5V) when it is not able to receive data. DTR is high
(>+2.5V) at all times.
DSR: A high (>+2.5V) supplied by the external device (or by being connected to the
DTR line) enables the gage to transmit data. A low (<-2.5V) supplied by the
external device, or by being connected to the RTS line, prevents the gage from
transmitting data.
Note: If the external device does not provide the proper DSR signal, then you must
connect DTR to DSR (jump pin 6 to pin 20 in the 25 position cable
connector), or in the 25 pin connector on the attached equipment.
OQO
^ééÉåÇáñ=b=J=a~í~=lìíéìí=cçêã~í
Appendix E - Data Output Format

There are 9 available output formats for transmitted data (note, F-3 is not used as an
available output format). Output formats vary depending whether you are using a dual
element transducer or a single element transducer. A general description of each is given
in Table 19 and Table 20.
The Model 37DL PLUS also has File Transfer Protocol (FTP) to transfer files between the
gage and your PC. See Appendix F - Remote Control Via RS-232 on page 277 for more
information about FTP.
Format File ID Thickness Waveforms Setup Note

Header Header Table Table Table
F-1 X X X X X X
F-2 X X X X X
F-4 X
F-5 X X X X X
F-6 X X X X
F-7 X X X X
F-8 X X X
F-9 X X X X X
F-10 X X X X
Table 19 Model 37DL PLUS Dual Element Transducer Output Formats
File ID Thickness Setup Appsetup Note

Format Waveforms
Header Header Table Table Table Table
F-1 X X X X X X X
F-2 X X X X X
F-4 X
F-5 X X X X X
F-6 X X X X
F-7 X X X X
F-8 X X X
F-9 X X X X X X
F-10 X X X X
Table 20 Model 37DL PLUS Single Element Transducer Output Formats
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OQP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Formats for Dual-Element Transducers
Format – F1
This format includes file header, 37 DLP thickness table with waveforms (whenever present), setup table,
and note table.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
FILE NAME: DEMO
FILE TYPE: INCREMENTAL
FILE DESCRIPTION: DEMO FILE OUTPUT FORMAT
INSPECTOR ID: GE PANAMETRICS TESTER 999999
LOCATION NOTE: WALTHAM MA USA
FILE DELETE PROTECTION: ON
OK
IDENTIFIER THICKNESS UNITS FLAGS NOTES SU #

001 0.098 IN M---WF 2
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
01 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 01
01 01 01 00 00 01 02 01 01 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 01 01 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 03 06 06 01 05 06 13 1F 1F 2D
32 31 31 03 20 1D 1D 3F 5B 6A 6A 4A 65 22 22 0D 3D 63 63 7B
7D 41 67 11 11 20 4C 68 68 61 6F 43 43 14 19 40 40 5D 69 62
62 24 49 08 08 31 4F 59 5C 46 46 03 28 20 20 3C 4C 4E 4E 2D
43 0E 0E 10 2E 41 41 4A 4C 3B 3B 0F 1A 3D 65 7F 7F 71 7F 3B
3B 10 5C 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 06 63 53 53 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 1E
3B 6D 6D 7F 7F 7F 7F 3F 7F 10 10 5A 7F 7F 7F 77 7F 36 36 12
53 7F 7F 7F 7F 3A 6D 01 01 39 66 7F 7F 75 7F 53 53 12 23 45
45 6B 7F 7F 7F 52 78 19 2E 74 74 7F 7F 7F 7F 52 7F 1C 1C 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 07 77 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 49 49 28 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 06 59 5B 5B 7F 7F 7F 7F 40 7F 0B 4E 7A 7A 7F
7F 5C 5C 0F 28 41 41 65 77 72 72 33 5B 04 04 2B 52 6A 6A 6B
74 29 52 10 10 4C 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 77 77 25 3D 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 66 7F 12 12 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 3C 7F 32 32 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 5E 5E 03 56 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 0B 54 35 64 79 79 5E 76 36
36 08 21 40 40 51 52 47 47 10 30 10 10 2D 40 48 49 3B 3B 00
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
DETECTION MARKER = 39
EXTENDED BLANK MARKER = 0
SENSITIVITY MODE = FALSE
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
OQQ
Format – F1
and note table.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
RECTIFICATION = FW
002 0.196 IN M---WF 2

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 01 00 00 00 01 00
00 00 01 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01
01 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 00
00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 01 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 02 03 03 05 08 08 08 03 06 12 1F 2D 2D 2F 33 1C
1C 01 24 45 45 5D 67 5D 5D 13 3E 1B 1B 45 66 74 77 5C 5C 07
34 25 25 4A 62 67 67 3F 5A 1C 1C 07 29 43 43 4F 50 41 41 0F
2B 0C 25 33 33 34 38 29 29 03 17 0F 0F 1C 25 27 27 17 21 0C
0C 00 08 0E 0E 10 11 0B 0F 07 07 00 03 00 00 01 04 03 03 03
03 05 05 04 05 05 05 03 04 02 02 00 01 03 04 04 04 05 06 01
01 00 02 05 05 07 09 08 08 04 07 03 03 00 02 05 07 07 07 04
05 02 02 00 02 03 03 04 04 03 03 00 01 01 01 01 02 01 01 02
03 05 07 05 05 02 0E 1C 1C 29 31 30 30 02 21 23 23 46 5F 6A
6A 45 63 15 15 21 51 74 7F 7F 7F 39 68 00 00 33 5C 76 76 6B
7B 4A 4A 0E 1E 36 36 54 62 62 62 30 4F 0E 14 32 32 45 4B 43
43 1A 32 01 01 16 29 34 34 30 34 24 24 03 14 0B 16 1E 1E 23
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
RECTIFICATION = FW
003 0.293 IN M---WF 2

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
01 01 01 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 00 00
00 00 01 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 01 00 00 01 01 00 00 01 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
01 01 01 00 00 01 01 00 00 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 01 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OQR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Format – F1
and note table.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
01 01 01 00 01 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 02 00
01 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 01 04 04 06 09 02 05 0D 0D 1B 29 31 31 25 32 08 08 1A
3E 59 59 64 68 4B 4B 12 20 41 41 66 7D 6B 7F 41 41 0F 22 4C
4C 68 73 67 67 26 4C 03 03 2A 49 58 58 4C 5A 14 33 0C 0C 28
3B 42 42 2E 3C 1B 1B 04 10 24 24 2D 2F 29 29 0F 1D 02 02 11
1C 1F 21 19 19 02 0F 08 08 11 16 16 16 0F 15 07 07 00 08 0E
0E 0F 0F 0C 0C 01 07 04 0A 0E 0E 0F 10 0C 0C 01 07 05 05 0B
0F 10 10 0C 10 05 05 00 07 0D 0D 10 11 0B 0F 05 05 00 07 0A
0A 0C 0D 0B 0B 01 06 03 03 08 0C 0C 0C 08 0B 02 06 02 02 06
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
RECTIFICATION = FW
OK
SU # VEL(/uS) DIFF LO-ALM HI-ALM EXT-BLANK UNITS TRANSDUCER GAIN dB

2 0.2260 0.000 0.000 25.000 9 IN D790/791 51
OK
CODE COMMENT
OK
OQS
Format – F2
This format includes file header, 37 DLP thickness table, setup table, and note table. This format excludes
waveform.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
FILE NAME: DEMO
OK

001 0.098 IN M---WF 2
002 0.196 IN M---WF 2
003 0.293 IN M---WF 2
OK

2 0.2260 0.000 0.000 25.000 9 IN D790/791 51
OK
CODE COMMENT
OK
Format – F4
This format includes only thickness infomation with waveforms (whenever present).
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
+0.098
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
01 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 01
01 01 01 00 00 01 02 01 01 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 01 01 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 03 06 06 01 05 06 13 1F 1F 2D
32 31 31 03 20 1D 1D 3F 5B 6A 6A 4A 65 22 22 0D 3D 63 63 7B
7D 41 67 11 11 20 4C 68 68 61 6F 43 43 14 19 40 40 5D 69 62
62 24 49 08 08 31 4F 59 5C 46 46 03 28 20 20 3C 4C 4E 4E 2D
43 0E 0E 10 2E 41 41 4A 4C 3B 3B 0F 1A 3D 65 7F 7F 71 7F 3B
3B 10 5C 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 06 63 53 53 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 1E
3B 6D 6D 7F 7F 7F 7F 3F 7F 10 10 5A 7F 7F 7F 77 7F 36 36 12
53 7F 7F 7F 7F 3A 6D 01 01 39 66 7F 7F 75 7F 53 53 12 23 45
45 6B 7F 7F 7F 52 78 19 2E 74 74 7F 7F 7F 7F 52 7F 1C 1C 7F
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OQT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Format – F4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 07 77 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 49 49 28 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 06 59 5B 5B 7F 7F 7F 7F 40 7F 0B 4E 7A 7A 7F
7F 5C 5C 0F 28 41 41 65 77 72 72 33 5B 04 04 2B 52 6A 6A 6B
74 29 52 10 10 4C 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 77 77 25 3D 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 66 7F 12 12 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 3C 7F 32 32 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 5E 5E 03 56 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 0B 54 35 64 79 79 5E 76 36
36 08 21 40 40 51 52 47 47 10 30 10 10 2D 40 48 49 3B 3B 00
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
RECTIFICATION = FW
+0.196
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 01 00 00 00 01 00
00 00 01 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01
01 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 00
00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 01 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 02 03 03 05 08 08 08 03 06 12 1F 2D 2D 2F 33 1C
1C 01 24 45 45 5D 67 5D 5D 13 3E 1B 1B 45 66 74 77 5C 5C 07
34 25 25 4A 62 67 67 3F 5A 1C 1C 07 29 43 43 4F 50 41 41 0F
2B 0C 25 33 33 34 38 29 29 03 17 0F 0F 1C 25 27 27 17 21 0C
0C 00 08 0E 0E 10 11 0B 0F 07 07 00 03 00 00 01 04 03 03 03
03 05 05 04 05 05 05 03 04 02 02 00 01 03 04 04 04 05 06 01
01 00 02 05 05 07 09 08 08 04 07 03 03 00 02 05 07 07 07 04
05 02 02 00 02 03 03 04 04 03 03 00 01 01 01 01 02 01 01 02
03 05 07 05 05 02 0E 1C 1C 29 31 30 30 02 21 23 23 46 5F 6A
6A 45 63 15 15 21 51 74 7F 7F 7F 39 68 00 00 33 5C 76 76 6B
7B 4A 4A 0E 1E 36 36 54 62 62 62 30 4F 0E 14 32 32 45 4B 43
43 1A 32 01 01 16 29 34 34 30 34 24 24 03 14 0B 16 1E 1E 23
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
OQU
Format – F4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
RECTIFICATION = FW
+0.293
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
01 01 01 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 00 00
00 00 01 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 01 00 00 01 01 00 00 01 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
01 01 01 00 00 01 01 00 00 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 01 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
01 01 01 00 01 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 02 00
01 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 01 04 04 06 09 02 05 0D 0D 1B 29 31 31 25 32 08 08 1A
3E 59 59 64 68 4B 4B 12 20 41 41 66 7D 6B 7F 41 41 0F 22 4C
4C 68 73 67 67 26 4C 03 03 2A 49 58 58 4C 5A 14 33 0C 0C 28
3B 42 42 2E 3C 1B 1B 04 10 24 24 2D 2F 29 29 0F 1D 02 02 11
1C 1F 21 19 19 02 0F 08 08 11 16 16 16 0F 15 07 07 00 08 0E
0E 0F 0F 0C 0C 01 07 04 0A 0E 0E 0F 10 0C 0C 01 07 05 05 0B
0F 10 10 0C 10 05 05 00 07 0D 0D 10 11 0B 0F 05 05 00 07 0A
0A 0C 0D 0B 0B 01 06 03 03 08 0C 0C 0C 08 0B 02 06 02 02 06
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
RECTIFICATION = FW
Format – F5
This format includes 37 DLP thickness table with waveforms (whenever present), setup table, and note
table. This format excludes fileheader.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
IDENTIFIER THICKNESS UNITS FLAGS SU #
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OQV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Format – F5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
001 0.098 IN M---W- 2
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 03 15
25 16 53 50 49 62 38 55 33 52
49 39 46 20 39 33 32 38 50 63
46 63 63 63 63 54 63 63 63 63
63 63 51 63 41 63 63 58 63 63
63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 61
63 32 59 45 53 58 63 63 59 63
63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 50 60
27 41 35 32 36 20 62 59 63 63
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
RECTIFICATION = FW
002 0.196 IN M---W- 2

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 01 04 15 25
18 51 46 51 59 26 51 45 33 40
21 28 20 18 19 06 08 07 01 02
02 02 02 02 03 01 04 04 01 03
02 01 02 00 01 03 07 24 24 47
53 40 63 52 59 61 27 49 39 37
33 20 26 18 15 17 12 13 17 12
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
RECTIFICATION = FW
ORM
Format – F5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
003 0.293 IN M---W- 2

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
00 00 00 00 00 00 04 06 24 25
44 52 32 63 32 57 51 36 45 25
33 30 18 23 14 16 12 11 11 04
07 06 07 08 03 08 08 06 08 03
06 05 06 06 03 04 03 02 03 01
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
RECTIFICATION = FW
OK

2 0.2260 0.000 0.000 25.000 9 IN D790/791 51
OK
CODE COMMENT
OK
Format – F6
This format includes 37 DLP thickness table (no waveform), setup table, and note table. This format
excludes fileheader.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789

001 0.098 IN M---W- 2
002 0.196 IN M---W- 2
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` ORN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Format – F6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
003 0.293 IN M---W- 2
OK

2 0.2260 0.000 0.000 25.000 9 IN D790/791 51
OK
CODE COMMENT
OK
Format – F7
This is in conformance with the 26DL PLUS 16-character ID format. This format includes 26DL PLUS
thickness table in 16-character ID format with waveforms (whenever present) and setup table.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789

001 0.098 IN M---W- 2
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 03 15
25 16 53 50 49 62 38 55 33 52
49 39 46 20 39 33 32 38 50 63
46 63 63 63 63 54 63 63 63 63
63 63 51 63 41 63 63 58 63 63
63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 61
63 32 59 45 53 58 63 63 59 63
63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 50 60
27 41 35 32 36 20 62 59 63 63
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
RECTIFICATION = FW
002 0.196 IN M---W- 2

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
ORO
Format – F7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 01 04 15 25
18 51 46 51 59 26 51 45 33 40
21 28 20 18 19 06 08 07 01 02
02 02 02 02 03 01 04 04 01 03
02 01 02 00 01 03 07 24 24 47
53 40 63 52 59 61 27 49 39 37
33 20 26 18 15 17 12 13 17 12
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
RECTIFICATION = FW
003 0.293 IN M---W- 2

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
00 00 00 00 00 00 04 06 24 25
44 52 32 63 32 57 51 36 45 25
33 30 18 23 14 16 12 11 11 04
07 06 07 08 03 08 08 06 08 03
06 05 06 06 03 04 03 02 03 01
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
RECTIFICATION = FW
OK
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` ORP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Format – F7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 0.2260 0.000 0.000 25.000 9 IN D790/791 51
OK
FORMAT – F8
thickness table in 16-character ID format without waveforms, and setup table.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789

001 0.098 IN M---W- 2
002 0.196 IN M---W- 2
003 0.293 IN M---W- 2
OK

2 0.2260 0.000 0.000 25.000 9 IN D790/791 51
OK
Format – F9
This format includes the secondary measurements information (i.e. ThruCoat/TempComp). This format
includes the 37 DLP thickness table with waveforms (whenever present), setup table, application setup
table, and note table.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
IDENTIFIER THICKNESS UNITS FLAGS NOTES SU # CURR TEMP

001 0.100 IN M---WF 2 70 F
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 01 02 02 01 01 01 01 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 02 00 00 00
01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 01 01 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 02 03 04 04 04 05 00 08 14 14 20
2E 33 33 22 30 09 09 16 36 53 53 63 63 51 51 08 31 25 25 4C
66 66 6F 4D 4D 05 26 2D 2D 4C 5A 58 58 28 47 01 01 26 44 56
56 4C 59 31 31 0C 17 34 48 4E 4E 34 47 18 18 04 20 34 34 3C
3E 31 31 04 1D 14 14 2D 3D 44 44 26 3D 02 28 53 53 75 7F 78
78 0A 4C 41 41 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 33 33 25 7B 7F 7F 7F 7F 6D
7F 14 14 43 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 64 64 18 37 78 78 7F 7F 7F 7F 10
ORQ
Format – F9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
57 37 70 7F 7F 7F 7F 59 59 1E 20 55 55 7C 7F 7F 7F 3F 6D 05
05 33 63 7F 7F 7F 7F 2E 68 1C 1C 69 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 71 71 00
72 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 3E 7F 54 54 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 03 7C 6B
6B 7F 7F 7F 7F 77 7F 1A 1A 41 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 03 4F 41 41 74
7F 7F 7F 35 67 04 04 3B 66 7F 7F 6C 7F 45 45 12 24 52 52 74
7F 68 7F 3A 3A 02 4A 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 3B 7F 33 33 7F 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 0C 75 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 62 62 18 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 17 78 45 45 7F 7F 7F 7F 61 7F 18 28 5A 5A 72 73 5C
5C 07 35 23 23 43 54 55 55 2B 46 07 07 1C 3A 4F 55 51 51 1E
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
RECTIFICATION = FW
002 0.196 IN M---WF 2 70 F

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 01 01 00 01 00 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 01 01 00
00 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00
01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 00 00 01 02 02 04 07 08 08 02 04 0E 1C 2B 2B 32 33 24
24 09 18 3A 3A 55 65 63 63 26 4D 06 06 33 58 71 78 69 69 1E
49 10 10 3A 58 66 66 4D 62 2E 2E 0A 17 38 38 4C 51 49 49 1C
37 00 1A 2F 2F 38 38 2F 2F 0C 21 07 07 18 23 28 28 1C 26 12
12 03 06 0C 0C 10 11 0E 11 0A 0A 03 06 00 00 02 03 04 04 04
04 05 05 05 05 04 04 03 04 03 03 00 01 03 04 05 05 04 05 02
02 00 02 04 04 07 08 08 08 05 07 03 03 00 02 04 06 07 07 04
05 02 02 00 02 03 03 03 03 02 02 00 01 00 00 01 02 02 02 02
03 05 06 06 06 00 0A 18 18 27 2F 30 30 0B 25 17 17 3B 57 67
67 4E 65 24 24 0F 41 69 7F 7F 7F 49 72 12 12 24 50 6E 6E 71
7C 53 53 02 2B 2C 2C 4D 60 63 63 3A 55 0D 16 2D 2D 42 4B 47
47 21 37 07 07 11 25 33 33 31 36 27 27 07 17 08 14 1C 1C 22
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` ORR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Format – F9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
RANGE = 0.50
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
RECTIFICATION = FW
003 0.293 IN M---WF 2 70 F

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01
01 01 01 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
01 01 01 00 01 01 01 00 01 01 01 00 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 01
01 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 01
01 01 01 00 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00
01 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 02
02 00 01 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00
00 01 01 00 01 01 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00
00 00 00 00 00 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01
01 01 01 01 01 01 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00 00 01 04 04 06 08 00 06 0C 0C 1A 29 31 31 26 33 0A 0A 18
3B 57 57 67 69 4F 4F 0D 25 3E 3E 65 7E 6F 7F 48 48 15 1D 49
49 69 75 6D 6D 2B 51 01 01 27 47 5B 5B 51 5D 19 38 09 09 27
3B 43 43 32 40 1E 1E 07 10 23 23 2E 30 2C 2C 10 20 01 01 10
1C 20 21 1B 1B 04 12 07 07 11 17 18 18 11 17 09 09 00 07 0E
0E 10 10 0D 0D 03 08 04 09 0F 0F 10 10 0D 0D 03 08 04 04 0B
0F 11 11 0D 10 07 07 00 08 0D 0D 11 11 0D 11 07 07 00 06 0C
0C 0D 0E 0C 0C 02 08 02 02 08 0C 0D 0D 09 0C 02 06 02 02 05
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
AGC WAVEFORM = TRUE
SENSITIVITY = 51
RECTIFICATION = FW
OK
SU # VEL(/uS) LO-ALM HI-ALM BLANK UNITS XDCR GAIN CAL TEMP TEMP COEF
ORS
Format – F9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 0.2260 0.000 25.000 9 IN D790/791 51 70 F -0.00010
OK
CODE COMMENT
OK
Format – F10
includes 37 DLP thickness table without waveforms, setup table, and note table.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
IDENTIFIER THICKNESS UNITS FLAGS NOTES SU # CURR TEMP

001 0.100 IN M--WF 2 70F
002 0.196 IN M--WF 2 70F
003 0.293 IN M--WF 2 70F
OK
SU # VEL(/uS) LO-ALM HI-ALM BLANK UNITS XDCR GAIN CAL TEMP TEMP COEF
2 0.2260 0.000 25.000 9 IN D790/791 51 70 F -0.00010
OK
CODE COMMENT
OK
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` ORT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Formats for Single-Element Transducers
Format – F1
and note table.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
FILE NAME: DEMO
OK

001 0.097 IN 1---WF 3
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
91 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2B 25 2B 18 32 32
60 60 7A 6F 7A 67 6F 6C 7E 7E 80 7A 80 7A 7B 7B 80 80 80 7D
80 7D 7D 7D 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 80 7F
80 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 80 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E
7F 7F 82 82 9E 9E AF 75 AF 44 75 34 48 48 6B 6B 89 84 89 84
8A 8A 92 8C 92 83 8C 82 83 80 82 7F 80 7D 7F 7D 7E 7C 7E 7C
7D 7C 7D 7C 7C 7C 7E 7E 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F
80 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 7E 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 80 80
82 82 91 91 96 6F 96 59 6F 58 6C 6C 81 81 8E 84 8E 84 84 84
85 81 84 7E 81 7D 7E 7D 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7E 7F 7D 7E 7D
7D 7D 7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 80 7F 80 80 81 80 81 80 80 80 80 80
80 80 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 80 80 82 81 82 81 82 80 82 80 81 81
88 88 89 70 89 66 70 66 7A 7A 89 89 8E 7F 8B 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E
7E 7C 7E 7C 7D 7D 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 80 80 7E 80 7D 7E 7D
7F 7E 80 7F 80 80 80 80 81 80 81 80 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7E
7F 7D 7E 7D 7E 7E 80 80 81 80 81 80 80 80 81 80 81 80 84 82
84 73 82 70 73 70 82 82 8C 87 8C 7C 87 7B 7C 7B 7E 7E 7E 7D
7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F
80 80 80 80 80 7F 80 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 80 80 81 81 81 80
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
DETECTION MARKER1 = 46
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 14
ECHO WINDOW END = 199
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
ORU
Format – F1
and note table.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
002 0.194 IN 1---WF 3

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
92 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 01
48 48 7E 6B 7E 58 6B 5C 7C 7C 80 76 80 76 78 78 80 80 80 7E
80 7D 7E 7D 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F
7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F
80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
81 81 98 98 A9 8A A9 5A 8A 36 5A 36 52 52 88 88 8C 8B 8D 8D
94 93 94 87 93 84 87 82 84 80 82 7D 80 7C 7D 7C 7D 7D 7E 7D
7E 7C 7D 7D 7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 80 80 7F
80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7E 7F 7D 7E 7D 7E 7E 7F 7F 80 80
80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
80 80 81 80 80 80 81 80 81 7F 80 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E
7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 81 80
81 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 80 81 81 8C 8C
92 7E 92 67 7E 55 67 57 84 84 92 8F 93 89 8F 86 89 85 86 7E
85 7C 7E 7C 7C 7C 7C 7C 7E 7E 7E 7E 80 80 80 80 80 7E 80 80
80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` ORV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Format – F1
and note table.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
003 0.292 IN 1---WF 3

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
92 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 0E 10 00 0E 0A
4F 4F 7D 6A 7D 57 6A 5B 7C 7C 7F 74 7F 74 76 76 7F 7F 81 7D
81 7D 7D 7D 7E 7E 7E 7D 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7E
7F 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7E 80 7E 80 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E
7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7E
80 7E 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 7F 7F
80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F
7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7E 80 7E 80 7F 80 80 82 82
92 92 A2 94 A7 6B 94 34 6B 34 41 41 7C 7C 8F 8F 91 91 97 97
97 8F 97 8A 8F 82 8A 7E 82 78 7E 77 78 77 7A 7A 7C 7C 7D 7D
7E 7E 7F 7E 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F
80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7E 7F 7E
7E 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 80 80 80 81 81
81 81 81 81 82 80 82 80 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
OK
OSM
Format – F1
and note table.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

3 0.2260 0.000 0.000 25.000 22 IN M112 47
OK
SETUP NUMBER : 0003
SETUP NAME : DEFM1-10.0/M112
MEASUREMENT TYPE : 1
PROBE TYPE : 4
MATERIAL VELOCITY : 0.2260IN/us
ZERO : 212.80
PULSER VOLTAGE : 3
MAXIMUM GAIN : 2400
INITIAL GAIN : 930
TDG SLOPE : 2398
MAIN BANG BLANK : 22
ECHO WINDOW : 13967
DETECTION MODE : 1
ECHO1 DETECTION : 1
ECHO2 DETECTION : N/A
INTERFACE BLANK : N/A
MODE3 ECHO BLANK : N/A
DATA WINDOW 1 : N/A
DATA WINDOW 2 : N/A
OK
CODE COMMENT
OK
Format – F2
waveform.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
FILE NAME: DEMO
OK
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OSN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Format – F2
waveform.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
001 0.097 IN 1---WF 3
002 0.194 IN 1---WF 3
003 0.292 IN 1---WF 3
OK

3 0.2260 0.000 0.000 25.000 22 IN M112 47
OK
CODE COMMENT
OK
Format – F4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
+0.097
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
91 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2B 25 2B 18 32 32
60 60 7A 6F 7A 67 6F 6C 7E 7E 80 7A 80 7A 7B 7B 80 80 80 7D
80 7D 7D 7D 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 80 7F
80 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 80 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E
7F 7F 82 82 9E 9E AF 75 AF 44 75 34 48 48 6B 6B 89 84 89 84
8A 8A 92 8C 92 83 8C 82 83 80 82 7F 80 7D 7F 7D 7E 7C 7E 7C
7D 7C 7D 7C 7C 7C 7E 7E 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F
80 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 7E 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 80 80
82 82 91 91 96 6F 96 59 6F 58 6C 6C 81 81 8E 84 8E 84 84 84
85 81 84 7E 81 7D 7E 7D 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7E 7F 7D 7E 7D
7D 7D 7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 80 7F 80 80 81 80 81 80 80 80 80 80
80 80 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 80 80 82 81 82 81 82 80 82 80 81 81
88 88 89 70 89 66 70 66 7A 7A 89 89 8E 7F 8B 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E
7E 7C 7E 7C 7D 7D 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 80 80 7E 80 7D 7E 7D
7F 7E 80 7F 80 80 80 80 81 80 81 80 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7E
7F 7D 7E 7D 7E 7E 80 80 81 80 81 80 80 80 81 80 81 80 84 82
84 73 82 70 73 70 82 82 8C 87 8C 7C 87 7B 7C 7B 7E 7E 7E 7D
7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F
80 80 80 80 80 7F 80 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 80 80 81 81 81 80
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
OSO
Format – F4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
+0.194
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
92 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 01 01
48 48 7E 6B 7E 58 6B 5C 7C 7C 80 76 80 76 78 78 80 80 80 7E
80 7D 7E 7D 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F
7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F
80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
81 81 98 98 A9 8A A9 5A 8A 36 5A 36 52 52 88 88 8C 8B 8D 8D
94 93 94 87 93 84 87 82 84 80 82 7D 80 7C 7D 7C 7D 7D 7E 7D
7E 7C 7D 7D 7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 80 80 7F
80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7E 7F 7D 7E 7D 7E 7E 7F 7F 80 80
80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
80 80 81 80 80 80 81 80 81 7F 80 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E
7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 81 80
81 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 80 81 81 8C 8C
92 7E 92 67 7E 55 67 57 84 84 92 8F 93 89 8F 86 89 85 86 7E
85 7C 7E 7C 7C 7C 7C 7C 7E 7E 7E 7E 80 80 80 80 80 7E 80 80
80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OSP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Format – F4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
+0.292
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
92 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 10 0E 10 00 0E 0A
4F 4F 7D 6A 7D 57 6A 5B 7C 7C 7F 74 7F 74 76 76 7F 7F 81 7D
81 7D 7D 7D 7E 7E 7E 7D 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7E
7F 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7E 80 7E 80 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E
7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7E
80 7E 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 7F 7F
80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F
7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7E 80 7E 80 7F 80 80 82 82
92 92 A2 94 A7 6B 94 34 6B 34 41 41 7C 7C 8F 8F 91 91 97 97
97 8F 97 8A 8F 82 8A 7E 82 78 7E 77 78 77 7A 7A 7C 7C 7D 7D
7E 7E 7F 7E 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F
80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7E 7F 7E
7E 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 80 80 80 81 81
81 81 81 81 82 80 82 80 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
OSQ
Format – F5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789

001 0.097 IN 1---W- 3
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
29 00 00 03 05 23 23 25 25 25
25 24 24 24 25 25 25 24 24 24
25 36 36 19 27 29 29 25 25 24
24 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
29 30 20 28 28 26 25 25 25 24
24 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
27 27 27 28 24 24 24 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 24 25 25 25 26
26 25 28 26 24 24 25 25 24 24
25 25 24 25 25 25 25 25 24 25
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
002 0.194 IN 1---W- 3

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
29 00 00 00 00 24 24 25 25 25
25 24 24 24 24 24 25 25 24 24
25 24 24 24 25 25 24 25 25 24
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 25 25 24
31 35 27 27 28 30 29 26 25 24
24 24 24 25 25 25 25 24 24 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 24 24
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OSR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Format – F5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
24 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 28
29 24 29 29 27 26 24 24 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 24 24 24 25
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
003 0.292 IN 1---W- 3

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
29 00 00 00 00 24 24 24 24 25
25 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
24 25 24 25 24 24 24 24 24 24
24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 24
24 25 25 25 25 25 25 24 24 25
24 25 25 24 25 25 25 25 25 25
33 34 19 28 30 30 28 25 23 24
24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 24 24
24 24 25 25 25 24 24 24 25 25
25 25 25 24 24 24 25 25 25 25
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
OSS
Format – F5
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
OK

3 0.2260 0.000 0.000 25.000 22 IN M112 47
OK
CODE COMMENT
OK
Format – F6
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789

001 0.097 IN 1---W- 3
002 0.194 IN 1---W- 3
003 0.292 IN 1---W- 3
OK

3 0.2260 0.000 0.000 25.000 22 IN M112 47
OK
CODE COMMENT
OK
Format – F7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OST
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Format – F7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
001 0.097 IN 1---W- 3
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
29 00 00 03 05 23 23 25 25 25
25 24 24 24 25 25 25 24 24 24
25 36 36 19 27 29 29 25 25 24
24 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
29 30 20 28 28 26 25 25 25 24
24 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
27 27 27 28 24 24 24 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 24 25 25 25 26
26 25 28 26 24 24 25 25 24 24
25 25 24 25 25 25 25 25 24 25
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
002 0.194 IN 1---W- 3

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
29 00 00 00 00 24 24 25 25 25
25 24 24 24 24 24 25 25 24 24
25 24 24 24 25 25 24 25 25 24
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 25 25 24
31 35 27 27 28 30 29 26 25 24
24 24 24 25 25 25 25 24 24 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 24 24
24 24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 28
29 24 29 29 27 26 24 24 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 24 24 24 25
ZOOM = FALSE
OSU
Format – F7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
003 0.292 IN 1---W- 3

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
29 00 00 00 00 24 24 24 24 25
25 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
24 25 24 25 24 24 24 24 24 24
24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 24
24 25 25 25 25 25 25 24 24 25
24 25 25 24 25 25 25 25 25 25
33 34 19 28 30 30 28 25 23 24
24 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 24 24
24 24 25 25 25 24 24 24 25 25
25 25 25 24 24 24 25 25 25 25
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OSV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Format – F7
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
RECTIFICATION = RF
OK

3 0.2260 0.000 0.000 25.000 22 IN M112 47
OK
Format – F8
thickness table in 16-character ID format without waveforms, and setup table.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789

001 0.097 IN 1---W- 3
002 0.194 IN 1---W- 3
003 0.292 IN 1---W- 3
OK

3 0.2260 0.000 0.000 25.000 22 IN M112 47
OK
OTM
Format – F9
This format includes the secondary measurements information (i.e. ThruCoat/TempComp/Oxide Layer).
This format includes 37 DLP thickness table with waveforms (whenever present), setup table, application
setup table, and note table.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
IDENTIFIER OXIDE MEAS MATL MEAS PRIMARY FLAGS NOTES SU#

001 0.007 IN 0.052 IN OXIDE 1---W 2
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
5B 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
07 07 40 40 4C 4C 5C 5C 66 66 6A 6A 71 71 73 73 76 76 76 76
79 79 7A 7A 85 85 9A 9A C2 B0 C2 55 B0 33 55 33 3B 3B 5A 5A
6B 6B 85 85 8C 8C 8F 8C 8E 85 8C 82 85 7F 82 7E 7F 7F 7F 7E
7F 7F 80 80 8C 8C 9C 9C AB 89 A6 4E 89 4D 4E 4D 6D 6D 7A 7A
87 87 8C 8A 8C 81 8A 7C 81 79 7C 79 79 79 7B 7B 7B 7B 7D 7D
7D 7D 81 81 87 87 9D 90 A2 76 90 5E 76 5E 6C 6C 86 86 89 85
89 83 85 7C 83 79 7C 75 79 75 75 75 7A 7A 7D 7D 7E 7E 7E 7E
7F 7F 84 84 8A 8A 97 90 97 6B 90 66 6B 66 7F 7F 8B 88 8B 7E
88 7B 7E 76 7B 75 76 75 78 78 7A 7A 7E 7E 7F 7F 82 82 83 83
86 86 8A 8A 8D 8D 90 83 8F 6C 83 6C 6F 6F 85 85 87 7D 87 79
7D 77 79 77 78 78 79 79 7E 7E 80 80 81 81 81 81 82 82 84 84
84 84 84 84 89 89 8A 7A 8A 70 7A 70 7B 7B 87 82 87 79 82 78
79 78 7A 7A 7B 7B 7D 7D 7F 7F 83 82 83 82 83 83 83 83 84 83
84 83 83 83 83 82 83 73 82 71 73 71 80 80 84 7F 84 7B 7F 7B
7C 7C 7F 7F 80 7F 80 80 80 80 82 82 82 81 82 81 81 81 82 80
82 80 81 80 82 7F 82 74 7F 74 76 76 84 84 84 7C 84 7B 7C 7B
7E 7E 7F 7F 81 81 82 82 83 83 83 82 83 81 82 80 81 7F 80 7E
7F 7E 7E 7E 7E 7C 7E 78 7C 77 7C 7C 82 82 85 7C 82 7C 7D 7D
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 17
DATAWIN 1 END = 40
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OTN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Format – F9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
002 0.008 IN 0.152 IN OXIDE 1---W 2
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
5B 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
26 26 4E 4E 53 53 5E 5E 68 68 6C 6C 72 72 74 74 78 78 78 78
7B 7B 7B 7B 7D 7D 7D 7D 7D 7C 7D 7C 7D 7D 7E 7D 7D 7D 7E 7D
7E 7D 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7D 7E 7D 7F 7E 7F 7E
7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E
7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7E
7F 7E 80 80 80 80 97 97 BA AB BA 57 AB 3A 57 32 3C 3C 4F 4F
74 74 83 83 94 94 96 95 98 90 95 88 90 83 88 82 83 7F 82 7F
7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7C
7E 7C 7C 7B 7C 7B 7B 7B 7D 7D 7D 7D 7F 7F 80 80 81 81 81 81
81 80 81 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 7F
80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 80 80 7F 80 7F
80 7F 80 7F 82 82 88 88 9C 96 9C 61 96 4F 61 4F 62 62 85 85
8C 8C 8E 8C 8E 87 8C 84 87 80 84 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E
7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7E
7F 7B 7E 7B 7B 7B 7C 7C 7E 7E 80 80 82 82 82 81 82 81 81 80
81 80 80 80 80 80 80 7F 80 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E
7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 80 80 80 80 82 82 84 84 84 82 84 81
82 80 81 7F 80 7F 87 87 8D 7F 8D 6C 7F 5D 6C 61 82 82 8C 8A
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 80
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
003 0.008 IN 0.300 IN OXIDE 1---W 2

PIXEL AMPLITUDES
OTO
Format – F9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
5B 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0B 0B 40 40 4C 4C 5D 5D 68 68 6B 6B 72 72 75 75 76 76 78 78
79 79 7A 7A 7C 7C 7C 7C 7C 7C 7C 7C 7C 7C 7E 7E 7E 7D 7E 7D
7E 7E 7E 7D 7E 7D 7F 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E
7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7F 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E
7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 80 7F 80 7E 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F
7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E
7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 80 7E 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 7F 7E 80 7F 80 7F
80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7E 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 84 84 90 90 B4 AD B4 58 AD 30 58 30 3E 3E 6C 6C
7C 7C 92 92 98 97 99 94 97 8D 94 89 8D 83 89 7F 83 7E 7F 7C
7E 7C 7C 7C 7C 7C 7C 7C 7D 7D 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7E 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 80 7F 80 7F 80 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F
7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7F 7E 7F 7F 7F 7D 7F 7D 7D 7D 7E 7E 7E 7E
7F 7F 80 80 80 80 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 80 81 80 81 81 81 80
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 139
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
OK

2 0.2260 0.000 0.000 25.000 22 IN M112 47
OK
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OTP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Format – F9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
SETUP NUMBER : 0002
SETUP NAME : DEFM1-10.0/M112
MEASUREMENT TYPE : 2
PROBE TYPE : 4
MATERIAL VELOCITY : 0.2260IN/us
ZERO : 212.80
PULSER VOLTAGE : 3
MAXIMUM GAIN : 2400
INITIAL GAIN : 930
TDG SLOPE : 2398
MAIN BANG BLANK : 22
ECHO WINDOW : 13967
DETECTION MODE : 1
ECHO1 DETECTION : 1
ECHO2 DETECTION : N/A
INTERFACE BLANK : N/A
MODE3 ECHO BLANK : N/A
DATA WINDOW 1 : 32
DATA WINDOW 2 : N/A
OK
CODE COMMENT
OK
Format – F10
This format includes the 37 DLP thickness table without waveforms, setup table, and note table.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
IDENTIFIER OXIDE MEAS MATL MEAS PRIMARY FLAGS NOTES SU#

001 0.007 IN 0.052 IN OXIDE 1---W 2
002 0.008 IN 0.152 IN OXIDE 1---W 2
003 0.008 IN 0.300 IN OXIDE 1---W 2
OK

2 0.2260 0.000 0.000 25.000 22 IN M112 47
OK
CODE COMMENT
OK
OTQ
Thickness Table: A thickness table consists of a header line, thickness data and
waveform data. The thickness table has some differences in the different formats. There
are six flags associated with each thickness reading in the Thickness Table. In formats
F-1 and F-2, the sixth flag is DN Flag; while in format F-5, the sixth flag represents a
comment code. These are positional and their possible values are shown below:
Flag Flag Condition Remarks
FLAG #1 M: Standard Measurement Measured Echo

L: Standard LOS Loss Of Signal
E: AE to E Measurement
l: AE to E LOS
e: ME to E Measurement
n: ME to E LOS
1: Mode 1 Meas
2: Mode 2 Meas
3: Mode 3 Meas
a: Mode 1 LOS
b: Mode 2 LOS
c: Mode 3 LOS
FLAG #2 Differential Mode
D: Diff Absolute
d: Diff Percentage
Standard Alarm
A: Alarm Standard
H: High Alarm Standard
L: Low Alarm Standard
-: No Alarm/Diff
Percent Previous Mode

p: Prev Thk % Alarm
r: Prev Thk % Low Alarm
g: Prev Thk % High Alarm
Absolute Previous Alarm Mode

a: Prev Thk Absolute Alarm
l: Prev Thk Absolute Low Alarm
h: Prev Thk Absolute High Alarm
FLAG #3 m: Minimum Minimum reading
M: Maximum Maximum reading
FLAG #4 G: Gain Modified Gain Changed manually
Table 21 Flag Conditions
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OTR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Flag Flag Condition Remarks
FLAG #5 M: Waveform Waveform stored

Z: Zoom
RF: Unrectified Wave
Full: Fullwave
Neg: Halfwave Negative
Pos: Halfwave Positive
FLAG #6 T: DN True Downloaded;
(F1, F2) F: DN False Created ID data stored
FLAG #6 -: No Comment No comment stored;
(F5 to F8) A thru Z: Comment Code Comment code
Table 21 Flag Conditions
A single line consisting of the text “OK” immediately follows the end of the Thickness
Table.
Setup Table: This table consists of a header line followed by 1 to 32 data lines. There is
one data line for each unique setup listed in the thickness table. In general, many
thicknesses/waveforms may share a common setup. The number of setups is limited to
64. When the setup table is full, any new setups are allocated the #00 and this entry in
the setup table indicates such status. Setup table has some differences in the different
formats.
A blank line precedes the Setup Table.
OTS
^ééÉåÇáñ=c=J=oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=sá~=opJOPO
Appendix F - Remote Control Via RS-232

You can control the Model 37DL PLUS from an external computer or programmable
controller using the serial RS-232 cable. In addition, you can also perform most gage
keypad functions by transmitting the proper commands to the gage over the serial cable.
These functions include setup, calibration, and data storage and retrieval. Each Model
37DL PLUS key has a corresponding remote command. For example, you can load a
complete setup and calibration parameters to the gage from a computer at the beginning of
each workshift without performing a manual setup and calibration.
Another computer control feature is the on-line or robotic thickness measurement and
reporting. A computer or machine controller directs the positioning of an ultrasonic
transducer on a robot arm while at the same time electronically entering the keys on the
Model 37DL PLUS. For example, an unattended computer could set up and change to
Differential Measure mode, change resolution, calibrate and/or set different velocity
values, or read the various thickness values. The controlling program can repeat the same
sequence of steps for each product to be measured.
The command set is divided in two formats:
Multi-Character commands: Consists of two or more characters and may be followed by
a terminator.
Single-Character commands: Consists of a single character with no terminator, used to
imitate keystrokes on the gage remotely.
To change the command formats, follow these steps.
1. Press [2ndF], [0] (SETUP).

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Communication option. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Comm Protocol option.
4. Press [ ] and [ ] to toggle between the SINGLE or MULTI character command.
Press [ENTER].
Multi-Character Commands
This section describes all Multi-Character commands and illustrates the syntax used with
each command.
Note: Commands are case sensitive and, if appropriate, terminated with a carriage-
return line-feed pair (i.e. /r/n). The term host used in the command
description always refers to the sender of the command.
Many responses to the Multi-Character commands documented in the section are

described in more detail in the GE Panametrics 37DLP Series FTP companion document.
Please contact GE Panametrics if you need a copy of the document.
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OTT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
FTP Block Information

This command instructs the gage to send to the host information about the FTP blocks
supported by the gage. See GE Panametrics document 37DLP Series FTP for details about
the FTP INFO block send back by the gage.
Command Format: FTPINFO?\r\n
Notes:
\r is the carriage-return character (0x0D hexadecimal byte value).
\n is the line-feed character (0x0A byte hexadecimal value).
Gage Information
This command instructs the gage to send to the host general information about the gage.
See GE Panametrics document 37DLP Series FTP for details about the GAGE INFO
block send back by the gage.
Command Format: GAGEINFO?\r\n
Notes:
\n is the line-feed character (0x0A byte hexadecimal value).
File Directory
This command instructs the gage to send to the host the file directory that exists on the
gage. See GE Panametrics document 37DLP Series FTP for details about the DIR INFO
block sent back by the gage.
Command Format: FILEDIR?\r\n
Notes:
\n is the line-feed character (0x0A hexadecimal byte value).
OTU
File Read
This command instructs the gage to send to the host a file that exists on the gage. See GE
Panametrics document 37DLP Series FTP for details on the FREAD INFO block and the
file transmission blocks sent back by the gage.
Command Format: FILEREAD?\2\r\n
FREAD INFO block
\3
Notes:
\2 is the STX character (0x02 hexadecimal byte value).
\3 is the ETX character (0x03 hexadecimal byte value).
File Write
This command instructs the gage to receive a file that is sent by the host. See GE
Panametrics document 37DLP Series FTP for details about the file info transmission
blocks sent to the gage.
Command Format: FILEWRITE=\2\r\n
TRANSMISSION INFO block
FILE HEADER INFO block
ID INFO block
SU TABLE INFO block
NOTE TABLE INFO block
\3
Notes:
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OTV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
File Delete
This command instructs the gage to delete a file that is on the gage. See GE Panametrics
document 37DLP Series FTP for details about the FILEDELETE INFO block.
Command Format: FILEDELETE\2\r\n
FILEDELETE INFO block
\3
Notes:
Application Setup Directory

This command instructs the gage to send to the host the active setup and all of the user
setups that exists on the gage. See GE Panametrics document 37DLP Series FTP for
details about the APP SU TABLE INFO block sent back by the gage.
Command Format: APPSUDIR?\r\n
Notes:
Application Setup Read

This command instructs the gage to send to the host the application setup that is requested.
See GE Panametrics document 37DLP Series FTP for details about the APP SU INDEX
block and the APP SU INFO block sent back by the gage.
Command Format: APPSUREAD?\2\r\n

APP SU INDEX block
\3
Notes:
OUM
Application Setup Write

This command instructs the gage to receive an application setup that is sent from the host.
See GE Panametrics document 37DLP Series FTP for details on the APP SU INDEX and
APP SU INFO blocks.
Command Format: APPSUWRITE=\2\r\n
APP SU INDEX block
APP SU INFO block
\3
Notes:
Make Application Setup Active

This command instructs the gage to make the given application setup the active setup. See
GE Panametrics document 37DLP Series FTP for details about the APP SU INDEX
block.
Command Format: APPSUACTIVE=\2\r\n
APP SU INDEX block
\3
Notes:
Transducer List
This command instructs the gage to send to the host the list of transducers supported by the
gage. See GE Panametrics document 25HP Plus Series FTP for details about the XDCR
LIST INFO block sent back by the gage.
Command Format: XDCRLIST?\r\n
Notes:
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OUN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Units Get
This command instructs the gage to send the current units specification (“IN” or “MM”) to
the host.
Command Format: UNITS?\r\n
Notes:
Velocity Get
This command instructs the gage to send the active setup velocity to the host. The velocity
is encoded into an ASCII string and may be decoded by the standard C scanf function (egs.
scanf (“%f”, &fVel))
Command Format: VELOCITY?\r\n
Notes:
Mode Get
This command instructs the gage to send the active setup measurement mode (“1”, “2” or
“3”) to the host. The mode number is encoded into an ASCII string and may be decoded by
the standard C scanf function (egs. scanf (“%d”, &iMode)).
Command Format: MODE?\r\n
Notes:
Version Get
This command instructs the gage to send the versions of the gage and monitor software to
the host (egs. “VERSION: 1.01/1.20C”).
Command Format: VER?\r\n
Notes:
OUO
Range Send
This command instructs the gage to do a range send of all of the IDs in the current file to
the host.
Command Format: ntt
Waveform Grab
This command instructs the gage to send screen data in FX80 format to the host.
Command Format: WFGRAB?\r\n
Notes:
Database Memory Status

This command instructs the gage to send information about the amount of free memory
remaining in the database. Three numbers are encoded into an ASCII string:
• Number of IDs without waveforms that can be created in a new file
• Number of IDs with waveforms that can be created in a new file
• Memory usage ratio for computations involving files that are a mix of IDs with and
without waveforms (egs. 16 means that an ID with a waveform uses the same memory
as 16 IDs without a waveform).
The numbers may be decoded by the standard C scanf function (egs. scanf (“%d %d %d”,
&iIds, &iIdsWfs, &IdsToIdsWfs)).
Command Format: MEMORY?\r\n
Notes:
Go to Monitor Mode
This command instructs the gage to go to the monitor mode.
Command Format: MONITOR=GO\r\n
Notes:
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OUP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Communication Protocol Change

This command instructs the gage to change the communication protocol from multiple to
single.
Command Format: PROTO=SINGLE\r\n
Notes:
Single-Character Commands
This section describes all Single-Character commands and illustrates the syntax used with
each command.
Command Name COMMAND Syntax Corresponding

Gage Key
ASCII Dec Hex Stroke(s)
Character
Setup Adjust ! 33 21 [2nd], [1]
Units # 35 23 [2nd], [3]
Meas Rate $ 36 24 [2nd], [4]
Min/Max % 37 25 [2nd], [5]
Hold/Blank & 38 26 [2nd], [7]
Diff ( 40 28 [2nd], [9]
Sp Mode ) 41 29 [2nd], [0]
Alarm * 42 2A [2nd], [8]
Number 0 0 48 30 [0]
Number 1 1 49 31 [1]
Number 2 2 50 32 [2]
Number 3 3 51 33 [3]
Number 4 4 52 34 [4]
Number 5 5 53 35 [5]
Number 6 6 54 36 [6]
Number 7 7 55 37 [7]
Number 8 8 56 38 [8]
Table 22 Command Syntax
OUQ

Gage Key
Character
Number 9 9 57 39 [9]
Resolution @ 64 40 [2nd], [2]
LCD Adjust B 66 42 [2nd], [Light]
Cal Lock C 67 43 [6], [3] Simultaneously
Slew Down D 68 44 [ ]ê
Clear Memory E 69 45 [2nd], [File]
Rectification F 70 46 [2nd], [Freeze]
Gain Optimization G 71 47 [2nd], [Gain]
Echo to Echo H 72 48 [2nd], [Zoom]
Note I 73 49 [2nd], [ID#]
Slew Left L 76 4C [ ç]
Escape M 77 4D [2nd], [Meas]
Slew Right R 82 52 [ è]
Print T 84 54 [2nd], [Send]
Slew up U 85 55 [ ]é
Zoom Z 90 5A [Zoom]
File \ 92 5C [File]
Status ^ 94 5E [2nd], [6]
Alarm a 97 61 [2nd], [8]
Light b 98 62 [Light]
Cal c 99 63 [Cal]
Diff d 100 64 [2nd], [9]
Clear Memory e 101 65 [2nd], [FILE]
Freeze f 102 66 [Freeze]
Recall Setup g 103 67 [RECALL SETUP]
ID i 105 69 [ID#]
Delay l 108 6C [2nd], [Range]
Meas m 109 6D [Meas]
Send n 110 6E [Send]
Table 22 Command Syntax (Continued)
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OUR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp

Gage Key
Character
Enter p 112 70 [Enter]
Range r 114 72 [Range]
Save s 115 73 [Save]
Single Send t 116 74 [Send]
Units u 117 75 [2nd], [3]
Velocity v 118 76 [Vel]
Setup Adjust x 120 78 [2nd], [1]
Zero z 122 7A [Zero]
Communication + 43 2B None
Protocol change Note: Changes comm
protocol from single to
multicharacter.
Table 22 Command Syntax (Continued)
OUS
^ééÉåÇáñ=d=J=^ÅÅÉëëçêáÉë=~åÇ=oÉéä~ÅÉãÉåí=m~êíë
Appendix G - Accessories and Replacement Parts
Description Part #
Carrying Case 36DLPLUS/CC

Heavy Duty Carrying Case Assembly 26DLPLUS/HDC
Small Protective Pouch Kit, including chest 36DLP/SPC/KIT
harness and waist strap
Manual 910-210
Pocket Instruction Card 25DLP/PIC
Interface Program WIN25DLPLUS
CD-ROM (Standard)
3 1/2" DD Diskette (Upon Request)
Printer-Portable, Battery or 115 VAC, 36PR
Thermal,80 Column
Printer-Portable, Battery or 230 VAC, 36PRE
Thermal, 80 Column
Paper for Printer, 1 box (5 rolls) 80PP
Dummy Plug Set 36DLP/PS
Battery-NiCad Rechargeable Alkaline Battery 36DLP/BP
Clip 36DLP/AA
Software Upgrade 25DLP/SU
Remote Save Handswitch 36DLP/RSA/H
Remote Send Handswitch 36DLP/RSE/H
Remote Save Footswitch 36DLP/RSA
Remote Send Footswitch 36DLP/RSE
Extended Warranty – 1 Year 36DLP/EW
Bar Code Wand 36DLP/BCW
RS-232 I/O CABLES
9-Pin Female “D” (6 feet) 36DLC/9F-6
25-Pin Male “D” (6 feet) 36DLC/25M-6
25-Pin Male “D” (12 feet) 36DLC/25M-12
Table 23 Accessories and Replacement Parts
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OUT
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
Description Part #

Cable for Portable Printers 36DLC/9M/PR-6
UNIVERSAL CHARGER/AC ADAPTERS 36CAPLUS
North America, South America, Japan, Korea 2111
European–Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, 1514
Germany, Netherlands, Sweden, Norway, Israel,
and Greece
Australia 1515
United Kingdom 1516
Italy 1517
Denmark 1518
India, Pakistan, South Africa, Hong-Kong 1519
COUPLANT
Propylene Glycol Couplant A-2, 2 oz. (.06 liter)
Glycerin Couplant B-2, 2 oz (.06 liter)
Gel Type Couplant D-12, 12 oz. (.35 liter)
Ultratherm-High Temp up to 1000°F Couplant E-2, 2 oz. (.06 liter)
Medium Temp up to 500°F Couplant F-2, 2 oz. (.06 liter)
TEST BLOCKS
5-Step, 1018 Steel 2214E
English Units; .100", .200", .300", .400", .500"
5-Step, 1018 Steel 2214M
Metric Units; 2.5, 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5mm
5-Step, Aluminum 2213E
English Units; .100", .200", .300", .400", .500"
4-Step, 1018 Steel 2212E
English Units; .250", .500", .750", 1.500"
2-Step, 303 Stainless Steel 2218E
English Units; .050", .1500" 2218M
Metric Units; 1, 15mm
Table 23 Accessories and Replacement Parts (Continued)
OUU
^ééÉåÇáñ=d=J=^ÅÅÉëëçêáÉë=~åÇ=oÉéä~ÅÉãÉåí=m~êíë
Description Part #
2-Step, 303 Stainless Steel, 2219E

English Units; .200", 1.500" 2219M
Metric Units; 5, 30mm
Table 23 Accessories and Replacement Parts (Continued)
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OUV
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
OVM
fåÇÉñ
Index
Numerics B-Scan freeze mode 114
2-D matrix grid datalogger file 145– B-Scan freeze review 114
149 B-Scan LOS mode 114
2-Dmatrix grid with custom point B-Scan max thickness 115
datalogger file 149–153 B-Scan max THK mode 115
3-D matrix grid datalogger file 153– B-Scan size mode 113
157 display full B-Scan 116
display half B-Scan 116
A enable B-Scan option 115–116
Accessories and replacement parts save A-Scan 117
287–289 save live thickness reading 117
Adjusting the extended blank with save reviewed thickness reading
D79X series transducers 108 117
Alarms save thickness reading 117
B-Scan 79–80
standard 75–77 C
thickness 77–79 Calibrating with dual element trans-
Audience 19 ducers
Automatic gain optimization 106–107 first time setup 33–35
restore the previous automatically material velocity and zero calibra-
optimized gain 107 tion 36–37
return to default gain 107 material velocity calibration of an
Automatic mode 109–110 unknown material sound
Avg/Min measurements 122–124 velocity 37–38
material velocity of a known ma-
B terial sound velocity 38
Backlight 90 thickness measurements 35
Bar code wand 177–178 thru-coat calibration 39
Battery transducer zero compensation 36
AA alkaline 32 zero calibration 38–39
battery charge 31 Calibrating with single element trans-
battery pack 30 ducers
charging 31 adjusting the range 57
other chargers 30 default or user-defined setup 50–
replacing 31–32 52
Battery problems 212 delay function 58
Beeper tone 84 first time setup 49–50
Blanking adjustments 111 thickness measurements 52–53
Boiler datalogger file 157–160 velocity and zero calibration 54–
B-Scan 113–117 55
B-Scan alarm mode 116 velocity calibration only 55–56
B-Scan direction 114 zero calibration only 56–57
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OVN
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
zoom mode 58–60 creating or editing comment tables

Calibration lock 81 from a computer 167
Charger problems 212 creating or editing comment tables
Clock 101–102 from the Model 37DL
Comment tables 167–168 PLUS 167
Communication reset 99–100, 208– database tracking 169
210 deleting a file 163–164
Communications mode 93–95 deleting comments from a com-
database tracking 95–96 ment table 167–168
Custom setups edit ID mode 173–174
echo 1 detect and echo 2 detect editing/renaming a file 164–166
193–194 erase a file 176
echo window 191–193 erase entire database 176–177
initial gain 189–190 erasing data 174–177
interface blank 194–195 erasing data in the active/open file
main bang blank 190–191 174–176
maximum gain 188–189 file name header structure 130
mode 3 echo blank 195–196 file name structure 129
probe type 187 flags 172
pulser power effects 187–188 generating reports 178–183
save setup parameters 197–198 identifier (ID number) structure
setup adjustment 196 129–130
setup name 187 incremental file type 135–138
single element transducers 185 opening a file 160–161
TDG slope 190 organizing 129
overview 127–129
D review ID mode 171–172
Data output formats 207–208, 243– save comments 170
276 save thickness and waveform 170
Database tracking 95–96, 169 save thickness readings 170
Datalogger saving data 169–171
2-D matrix grid file type 145–149 sequential file type 138–142
2-Dmatrix grid with custom point sequential with custom point file
file type 149–153 type 142–145
3-D matrix grid file type 153–157 standard editing commands 132–
bar code wand 177–178 133
Boiler file type 157–160 Datalogger flags in Echo-to-Echo
comment structure 131–132 mode 113
copy a note 168–169 DBase reset 100–101
copying a file 161–162 Detect mode function
create files from a computer 133 mode 1 185–187
create files from the Model 37DL mode 2 185–187
PLUS 133–134 mode 3 185–187
creating data files 132 Diagnostics 96–97, 213–215
OVO
fåÇÉñ
error status 97, 215

hardware status 97, 214–215 G
keypad test 97, 214 Gage operation
video display test 97, 214 basic 23
Differential mode Gage resets 98–101
normal differential 69 Gage screen
percent ratio 70–71 display elements 29–30
Documentation general information 30
related documentation 20 thickness display 30
revision history 21 Grid view 117–122
sending comments 20 data cell flag 120
typographic conventions 19 display full database grid 121
display half database grid 120
E enable grid view option 120
Echo blank 195–196 grid navigation 121–122
Echo window 191–193 grid size mode 118
echo 1 detect and echo 2 detect linearize rows and columns 119
193–194 reverse grid cols 118
echo blank 195–196 reverse grid rows 118
interface blank 194–195 save thickness readings 121
save setup parameters 197–198 transpose grid 119
setup adjustment 196
Echo-to-Echo mode 109 H
automatic mode 109–110 Half B-Scan 116
blanking adjustments 111 Half database grid 120
datalogger flags 113 Hardware status 97
manual mode 110–111 Hold/blank 87–88
return to normal measurement
mode 111 I
transducer usage 112–113 ID overwrite protection 92–93
Error messages 212 Inactive time 84–85
Error status 97 Incremental datalogger file 135–138
Extended blank Initial gain 189–190
adjust the depth 109 Interface blank 194–195
enabling 108
K
F Keypad 23–29
Fast mode 71 2nd F 26
Fisher gage communications 208 alarm 27
Freezing waveforms 81 backlight 25
Full B-Scan 116 cal 24
Full database grid 121 calibration lock 28
clear memory 28
delay 28
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OVP
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
differential 27 transducer 105–106

down arrow 25 Manual mode 110–111
enter 25 Master reset 101
extended blank 26 Maximum gain 188–189
fast mode 27 Maximum thickness mode 73–74
file 25 Measurement mode
freeze 25 backlight 90
ID number 26 beeper tone 84
keyboard layout 23 hold/blank 87–88
left arrow 25 ID overwrite protection 92–93
measurement/reset 24 inactive time 84–85
min/max measure 27 language 85
notes 28 radix 85–86
numeric keys 24 rectification 88–89
opt 29 resolution 87
power on/off 24 save key 91
print 28 supervisor lock 90–91
range 24 units 86
recall setup 26 waveform 89–90
right arrow 25 Measurement problems 213
save 25 Measurement reset 98–99
send 26 Min finder 73
setup mode 26 Minimum thickness mode 71–73
status 27 min finder 73
temp 27 Multi-Character Commands
up arrow 25 application setup directory 280
velocity 24 application setup read 280
waveform 28 application setup write 281
zero 24 communication protocol change
zoom 24 284
Keypad test 97 database memory status 283
file delete 280
L file directory 278
Language 85 file read 279
file write 279
M FTP block iInformation 278
Main bang blank 190–191 gage information 278
Maintenance go to monitor mode 283
gage 211 make application setup active 281
transducers 212 mode get 282
Manual gain adjust range send 283
amplitude proportional to gain transducer list 281
mode 106 units get 282
Manual gain adjust with D79X series velocity get 282
OVQ
fåÇÉñ
version get 282 Send snapshot to computer 202

waveform grab 283 Send snapshot to printer 202
Sequential datalogger file 138–142
O Sequential with custom point datalog-
Output formats ger file 142–145
dual-element transducers 244–257 Serial communications 204
single-element transducers 258– communication parameters 205–
274 206
RS-232 cables 204–205
P Serial interface 241–242
Product description 17 Setup modes
Avg/Min measure 93
R B-Scan/DB grid 93
Radix 85–86 clock 101–102
Receiving (downloading) files from a communications mode 93–95
computer 203–204 diagnostics 96–97
Rectification 88–89 measurement mode 83–93
full wave 88 resets 98–101
half wave negative 88 temperature compensation 93
half wave positive 88 Single send data 202
RF 88 Single-Character Commands 284–
Remote control via RS-232 277–286 286
Reports 178–183 Sound velocities 239–240
alarm report 182–183 Supervisor lock 90–91
file comparison report 181–182
min/max summary 180–181 T
summary with statistics report TDG slope 190
179–180 Technical specifications 225–238
Resets Temperature compensation 124–126
communication reset 99–100, Theory of operation
208–210 dual element transducer measure-
DBase reset 100–101 ments 219–220
master reset 101 factors affecting performance and
measurement reset 98–99 accuracy 220–223
Resolution 87 Thickness resolution 80–81
Return to normal measurement mode Thru-coat function 122
111 Transducer usage in Echo-to-Echo
mode 112–113
S Transmitting data 199–203
Save key 91 Troubleshooting
Send files to computer or printer 200– battery and charger problems 212
201 diagnostic self tests 213–215
Send range of ID numbers from a file measurement problems 213
201 Typographic conventions 19
m~êí=@=VNMJOPV` OVR
jçÇÉä=PTai=mirp
U
Units 86 Z
Uploading/downloading a stored Zoom mode
transducer setup to a computer 204 D79X Dual Element transducers
and Mode 1 Single Ele-
V ment transducers 58–59
Video display test 97 Single Element transducers in
W Mode 2 59
Warranty 3 Single Element transducers in
Waveform 89–90 Mode 3 59
WIN37DL PLUS interface program
210
OVS
Documentation Comments
GE Panametrics is always interested in improving its documentation. Please complete this
questionnaire and return your responses to:
GE Panametrics
221 Crescent Street
Waltham, MA 02453
Attention: NDT Marketing Dept., Technical Publications
You can also fax your comments to 781-899-1552, Attention: NDT Division, Marketing
Dept., Technical Publications.
Thank you for helping us improve our documentation!
Note: The following questionnaire is adapted from the “Judging Form” from the
Boston Chapter, Society for Technical Communication, Technical
Publications Competition, and “Revision Checklist” from John Lannon’s
Technical Writing, Seventh Edition (Addison Wesley Longman, 1997).
Document title : _____________________________________________________
Document number: __________________________________________________
Documentation Usability Ratings

In the sections that follow, please rate the usability of the document according to the
following rating system:
1 - Poor 2 - Below Average 3 - Average 4 - Above Average 5 - Excellent
Audience and purpose

Is the purpose of this manual clearly stated? 1 2 3 4 5
Does the document fulfill the purpose? 1 2 3 4 5
Is the audience clearly defined? 1 2 3 4 5
Does the document meet the audience’s needs? 1 2 3 4 5
Organization
Do the instructions follow the exact sequence of steps? 1 2 3 4 5
Is the organization appropriate and logical at all levels? 1 2 3 4 5
Are the headings specific and helpful? 1 2 3 4 5
Is the Table of Contents complete and useful? 1 2 3 4 5
Is the index comprehensive, easy to use, and cross-referenced? 1 2 3 4 5
Content
Do explanations enable readers to understand what to do? 1 2 3 4 5
Do notes, cautions, or warnings appear whenever needed,
in the appropriate place? 1 2 3 4 5
Is everything accurate? 1 2 3 4 5
Are the main points properly stressed? 1 2 3 4 5
Are there sufficient helpful examples? 1 2 3 4 5
Writing and Editing

Is the reading level appropriate to the audience? 1 2 3 4 5
Are the tone and style appropriate for the purpose and audience? 1 2 3 4 5
Is terminology consistent? 1 2 3 4 5
Are grammar, syntax, spelling, and punctuation correct? 1 2 3 4 5
Illustrations
Do the illustrations contribute to the usefulness of the document? 1 2 3 4 5
Are the illustrations effectively integrated into the text? 1 2 3 4 5
Are the illustrations clearly labelled? 1 2 3 4 5
Layout and Design

Is the layout effective for the audience and purpose? 1 2 3 4 5
Is the overall design consistent and coherent? 1 2 3 4 5
Overall Document 1 2 3 4 5
Additional Comments
Which topics are not covered that you would like to see covered in the next revision?
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Errors found in this manual:
Page Description of Error
_______ ________________________________________________________
_______ ________________________________________________________
_______ ________________________________________________________
Name _________________________ Company_____________________________

Mailing Address _____________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
Phone_________________________ E-Mail Address________________________
Fax No. ____________________________________________________________

37DLPLUS Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

37DLPLUS Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

fkpqor`qflk=j^kr^i

2 Defining Basic Gage Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

3 Set Up Calibration with D79X Series Dual Element Transducers . . . . . . . 33

4 Setting Up and Calibrating with EMAT Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

5 Set Up and Calibration with Single Element Transducers. . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

7 Managing Special Gage Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

7.6 Changing the Thickness Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

8 Managing Setup Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

9 Using Advanced Gaging Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

10 Managing the Datalogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

10.8 Creating or Editing Comment Tables from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

11 Custom Setups for Single Element Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

12 Managing Communications/Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

12.3 Uploading/Downloading a Stored Transducer Setup to a Computer . . . . . . . . . 204

13 Maintaining and Troubleshooting the Model 37DL PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Appendix A - Theory of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Appendix B - Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Appendix C - Sound Velocities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Appendix D - Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Appendix E - Data Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Appendix F - Remote Control Via RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Appendix G - Accessories and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Documentation Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Figure 1 Model 37DL PLUS Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Figure 43 Displaying a Waveform Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Figure 87 Selecting an Incremental File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Figure 131 Viewing File if Alarm Report is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

1.1 Product Description

A-Scan and B-Scan Display Options:

Internal Datalogger Functions:

• Erase selected data or all stored data

1.2 About this Document

1.4 Typographic Conventions

Warning: This information indicates danger and the possibility of personal

Note: This information provides explanatory information.

Tip: This information provides helpful guidelines for easy operation.

Courier Font Used for file names, lines of code, names of

→ Used for showing the next sequential step.

Table 1 Typographic Conventions

1.5 Related Documentation

1.6 If You have Documentation Comments

1.7 Revision History

Date Issue Release version

May 2003 910-239A First release (preliminary).

1.8 Technical Help

2 Defining Basic Gage Operation

2.1 Summarizing Keypad Functions

Figure 1 Model 37DL PLUS Keypad

Key Key Color Function

Green Power On/Off - Turns the

Yellow Zero - Compensates for

Yellow Cal - Switches the gage into

Yellow Velocity - 1) Displays and

Note: When using Thru-Coat,

Blue Zoom - 1) Changes the

Key Key Color Function

Blue Freeze - Causes the displayed

Orange Backlight - Controls the

Gray Enter - Used to select

Table 3 Keypad Definitions (Continued)

Key Key Color Function

Tan Send - Initiates transmission

Tan ID number (Identification

Gray Recall Setup - Recalls a